JP6464378B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a variable winning device.

  Conventionally, a variable winning device that can be converted into a first state (closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player and a second state (open state) that is advantageous for the player in the game area, and a start winning opening that allows the game ball to win A starting game for converting the variable winning device to the second state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) based on the winning of the game ball at the starting winning port, and the variable winning device as a result of the starting game. When a game ball that has won a prize flows into an internal special prize area, a big hit state is generated, and the variable prize device is converted to the second state based on a predetermined rule (18 operations or 10 prizes). Thus, there are known gaming machines that make it possible to obtain a large number of winnings.

In such a gaming machine, a guidance device for guiding the winning game ball so as to easily flow into the special winning area is provided inside the variable winning device (winning space), leading to the winning space of the variable winning device. If the game ball is guided by the guidance device in a timely manner, it flows into the special winning area with a high probability.
The induction device is operated by an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, and the operation is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the game ball has won the start winning opening, and can be operated for a predetermined time. It is common. Therefore, when the game ball won in the variable prize winning device has the operation timing of the guidance device, it flows into the special prize winning region with a high probability.

JP 2000-334103 A

However, since the conventional guidance device is operated by the action of the electric drive source as described above and the timing thereof is also controlled to be constant, the probability that the game ball flows into the special winning area is the second state. It is often determined at which timing in the second state the variable winning device converted into is, and it is difficult to realize an influential aspect of high interest.
That is, in such a gaming machine, a game ball that flows irregularly in the winning space will flow into the special winning area with intention, or it will be the last part of whether to win the special winning area The purpose is to enjoy whether or not the game balls that have flowed down will eventually win the special prize area, or whether or not the game balls that flow down will flow into the special prize area. It is difficult to realize.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, as described above, since the guidance device that is operated by an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is controlled at a certain timing, the probability that the game ball will flow into the special winning area It is conceivable to play a game by a technique such as so-called stop hitting or aiming hitting, which is to launch a game ball only at a timing when the ball becomes high.
When a game is played by such a method, the operating rate of the gaming machine is lowered and the profit of the gaming store is lowered.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, the present invention is to improve the interest when a game ball flows down in the winning space of the variable winning device and prevent the stoppage in the gaming machine equipped with the variable winning device.

The invention according to claim 1 is a start winning opening,
A variable winning device,
In a gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs when a gaming ball flows into a special winning area in the variable winning device,
The variable winning device is provided with a first guiding device and a second guiding device for repeating a predetermined operation as one cycle and guiding a game ball won in the variable winning device to a special winning area. With
Fluctuation control means for executing a fluctuation display game that fluctuates identification information based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening;
Opening control means for operating the variable winning device in an opening pattern based on the result of the variable display game;
The first guidance device and the second guidance device are set to a plurality of preset operation times as an operation time during which the guidance device operates from one of a plurality of predetermined operation positions to an operation initial stop position as a reference position . A variation time selection means for selecting the variation time of the variation display game from among the variation times,
The plurality of variation times are:
A first time corresponding to a first divided period obtained by dividing one period of the first guidance device by a first numerical value;
Using a second time corresponding to a second divided period obtained by dividing one period of the second guidance device by a second numerical value different from the first numerical value,
“Variable time = first time × A + second time × B (A is an integer of 1 or more, B is an integer of 1 or more and the second numerical value or less)” is established,
The opening pattern includes a first opening mode and a second opening mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first opening mode,
The variation time of the variation display game includes a first variation time that is equal to or less than an addition value of a time required for one cycle of the first guidance device and a time required for one cycle of the second guidance device, and the first A second variation time longer than one variation time ,
When the variation display game by the second variation time is executed, the release pattern can be the second release mode,
The variation time selection means includes:
All of said plurality of predetermined operating position, and sets the selectivity of the plurality of time-varying so as to generate substantially uniformly.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, in the gaming machine provided with the variable winning device, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball flows down in the winning space of the variable winning device and to prevent the hitting.

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a variable winning apparatus. It is a front view in the state where the variable prize-winning device is slightly inclined to the front side. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 1st accessory apparatus of a variable prize apparatus. It is a figure explaining the operation function of a variable prize apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the detail of the heavenly accessory apparatus of a variable prize apparatus. It is a figure explaining the detail of the round decision character of the board production | presentation apparatus in a variable prize apparatus. It is a figure which shows the mode that the board production | presentation apparatus in the variable prize-winning apparatus was decomposed | disassembled. It is a block diagram of a game control device. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an input process. It is a flowchart which shows a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows an output process. It is a flowchart which shows payout command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows a residual sphere monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a game stop error process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start port switch process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing starter switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize mouth count update process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific area switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure power-on operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during small hits. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit operation setting transfer process. It is a timing chart of a small hit operation. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit remaining ball process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a timing chart of jackpot operation. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows production command setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart which shows a distribution process and a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows a stopper solenoid control process. It is a flowchart which shows a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a motor control process. It is a flowchart which shows a motor operation | movement edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a motor operation | movement edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory effect command edit process. It is a flowchart which shows abnormal discharge | emission monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a game stop error status update process. It is a flowchart which shows a fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a discharge control process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a pulse signal edit process. It is a timing chart of the operation | movement of main prize ball signal transmission. It is a timing chart explaining operation | movement of the 1st accessory apparatus in a variable prize apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting of the fluctuation pattern distribution in a variable prize apparatus.

Hereinafter, as a first embodiment of the present invention, a configuration example when applied to a pachinko machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
Here, a pachinko machine as a suitable example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, in particular, a pachinko machine of a type belonging to a so-called feather object will be described sequentially from FIG.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 1 (game machine) of this example.
The pachinko machine 1 has a machine frame 2 fixed to an island where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is pivotally supported by the machine frame 2 at a hinge portion 3 so that the machine frame 2 can be pivoted. And a front frame 4 that can be freely opened and closed. A game board 30 (shown in FIG. 2) is attached to the front frame 4.

A glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the upper front side. Note that a game area 32 (to be described later) of the game board 30 is visible from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be opened and closed.
Here, the front frame 4 is referred to as a game frame, and the glass frame 5 is sometimes referred to as a front frame. In the present embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are described.
An operation panel 6 is provided below the glass frame 5.
Normally, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a CR unit (card type ball lending control unit) as a game medium lending device, but the illustration is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 has game nails planted on the front surface of a plate-like base material (so-called veneer), and a game area is obtained by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front surface with a guide rail 31. 32 is formed. The game area 32 is an area in which a game ball that has been thrown in is dropped from above and is judged to be out or safe (determination of whether or not a prize has been won), and when the game ball enters the winning opening and is effectively safe Is configured such that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to an upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 (that is, discharged as a prize ball).
Further, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) for the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the front frame 4.

Moreover, the upper plate 7 provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds a game ball before being discharged as a prize ball or a rental ball.
Further, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 that can move a game ball on the upper plate 7 by a player's operation, and a launch operation handle 11 that performs a launch operation of the game ball.
In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 5 so that decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, lamps or LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) ) To emit light for lighting (flashing)) (arranged on the left and right sides of the frame as shown in FIG. 1), speakers (upper speakers) 13a that emit sound (for example, sound effects), 13b is provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 13 c is also provided below the front frame 4. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal content is notified by voice from the speakers (upper speakers) 13a and 12b and the speaker (lower speaker) 13c. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp | ramp for alerting | reporting abnormality in the predetermined site | part of the glass frame 5. FIG.

In addition, an effect button 15 having an effect button switch 15a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 7. Further, a touch panel 16 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 15.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 16 is provided integrally with the effect button 15, but the touch panel 16 may be separate from the effect button 15. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 15, The touch panel 16 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the production button 15, a ball lending button 17 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge that is operated to discharge a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 18 and a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card are provided.
In the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the player rotates the firing operation handle 11, the game ball supplied from the upper plate 7 to the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30 is supplied to the game ball 30 by the hitting ball launching device. Fire towards. In addition, when the player operates the effect buttons 15 and the touch panel 16, in the round lottery effect in the board effect device 46 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 11), an effect in which the player's operation is intervened can be performed. .

B. 2 is a guide rail of the game board 30. As described above, a game area 32 is formed by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front surface of the game board 30 with the guide rail 31 as described above. Has been.
A pair of first start winning ports 33a and 33b (first starting ports) are provided in the lower part of the game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31 of the game board 30 so as to be separated from left and right. A second start winning port 34 (second start port) is provided in the center between the ports 33a and 33b.
The pair of first start winning ports 33a and 33b (first start ports) are also referred to as a left start port and a right start port, respectively. The second start winning opening 34 (second start opening) is also referred to as a medium start opening.
A left start port switch 105 and a right start port switch 106 (shown in FIG. 10) for detecting a game ball won in each of the first start winning ports 33a and 33b are disposed in the first start winning ports 33a and 33b, respectively. Has been. Further, the second start winning opening 34 is provided with a middle start opening switch 107 (shown in FIG. 10) for detecting a game ball that has entered the second start winning opening 34. In the center of the game area 32, a variable winning device 35 as shown in an enlarged view in FIG.

  Although not shown, the game area 32 is provided with a hitting direction changing member called a windmill, a number of obstacle nails, and general winning holes 36a and 36b, an out hole 37, and the like. Yes. Among these, each of the general winning ports 36a and 36b has a winning port switch 104 (1 to n depending on the number of general winning ports) for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning ports 36a and 36b. (Shown in FIG. 10).

  The variable winning device 35 is attached to a mounting opening (not shown) formed in the game board 30 from the front side of the game board 30, and a winning space that is open on the front side and extends rearward of the game board 30. A winning space forming member 42 for forming 41; In addition, the front side of the variable winning device 35 protrudes to the vicinity of the glass plate that covers the front surface of the game board 30, and is in the variable winning device 35 except when movable members 43 a and 43 b described later are opened. A game ball is prevented from entering.

Here, FIG. 2 shows the overall configuration of the game board 30 including the variable winning device 35, and FIG. 3 is a front view showing the variable winning device 35 as a single unit. Further, FIG. 4 shows the variable winning device 35 alone, while the variable winning device 35 as a whole is inclined slightly to the front side so that the state of the heaven inflow space 62 and the hell inflow space 63 described later can be easily understood. is there.
In the following description, FIG. 2 to FIG. 4 will be used. First, as shown in FIG. 2, an upper structural member (armor member) 44 is located in front of the game board 30 surface above the winning space 41. The game ball that functions as a decoration device on the upper part of the variable winning device 35 and prevents the game ball flowing down from above the variable winning device 35 from entering the winning space 41 and the right and left It is designed to guide in the direction.
On the other hand, a board effect device 46 and an information display 45 are provided on the lower side of the variable prize-winning device 35 as a round-determining character whose details are described later.
For convenience of explanation, the information display 45 will be described first. The information display 45 displays information according to the game state, and can display a plurality of identification information (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.). It has become. This information display 45 displays a demonstration screen, a display when a game ball wins a start winning opening 33a, 33b, 34, and a display when a game ball wins a special winning area 69 described later (when a special game occurs). In addition, display relating to various gaming states such as display during special gaming state is performed.
The information display 45 is not controlled by a game control device 100 (FIG. 10), which will be described later, but is controlled by an effect control device 300 as shown in FIG. The board effect device 46 is also controlled by the effect control device 300 as described later.

The information display 45 has a configuration in which two 7-segment LEDs are arranged, and displays various gaming states with combinations of the respective LEDs.
The two 7-segment LEDs make it possible to play various gaming states when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 33a, 33b (first start opening), that is, the game ball wins the start winning opening 33a, 33b, 34. Display when the game ball is won, a display when the game ball is won in the special prize area 69 (when a special game is generated), a display during the special game state and the game ball wins the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening) Various game states performed in this case, that is, a display when the game ball has won the start winning opening 34, a display when the game ball has won the special winning area 69 (when the special game occurs), a display during the special game state Etc.
As for the hold, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening), only one special figure is held (holding of the special figure 2). When the first start winning opening 33a, 33b (first start opening) is won, the special figure is not held (the special figure 1 is not held). Therefore, only the special figure 2 is displayed on the special figure hold display.

In the first embodiment, the information display 45 includes an LED. However, the information display 45 is not limited thereto, and may include a display such as a liquid crystal display, an EL display, or a CRT display.
In addition, when the information display 45 is configured to arrange a display such as a liquid crystal display, an EL, or a CRT instead of an LED, for example, when it is configured to arrange a liquid crystal display device, the installation location is shown in FIG. For example, the liquid crystal display device may be installed at a location where the left and right movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 face each other (a location indicated by an arrow in the winning space 41). .
By doing so, it is almost as high as the line of sight as seen from the player and can be viewed from the front, so that it is convenient to concentrate on the game. In addition, the liquid crystal display device can enjoy a more powerful production game than the case where the information display 45 is configured by LEDs.

  In addition, on the lower right side of the game board 30, a collective display device 50 is provided outside the guide rail 31. The collective display device 50 has two 7-segment LEDs and a plurality of small dot LEDs. It is configured. The collective display device 50 displays a so-called special figure (this special figure), and also displays a special display (this special figure) on-hold display (in some cases, a special figure hold display) and a game state display. For example, it is constituted by a plurality of indicators (for example, a indicator composed of one small lamp, or a seven-segment indicator capable of displaying numbers as a special figure) using LED as a light source. . For example, among the LED segments in the collective display device 35, those that display the special figure 1 are arranged as a special figure 1 display, and those that display the special figure 2 are arranged as a special figure 2 display.

Next, in FIGS. 2 to 4, a first accessory device 51 (guidance device) is provided below the winning space 41 below the upper structural member 44. The first accessory device 51 is also called a central bridge and is formed in a seesaw structure.
The left and right movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened so that the game ball flows into the winning space 41. As the ball that has flowed into the winning space 41 swings left and right like a seesaw as will be described in detail later, the first first accessory device 51 (detail) As will be described later, it is distributed to the left and right by the bridge body 80) of the first accessory device 51, and flows into either a heaven inflow space 62 or a hell inflow space 63 which will be described later. Note that there is a possibility of a big hit only when advancing to the heaven inflow space 62 on the right.

  The movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 have a rotation center at the lower end thereof, and a first large winning port solenoid 201 and a second large winning port solenoid 202 controlled by a game control device 100 described later. It can be turned left and right by driving (shown in FIG. 10). In a state where the movable members 43a and 43b are substantially vertical, the movable members 43a and 43b are in a state where the winning space 41 is blocked, and the game ball cannot enter the variable winning device 35. That is, this state is a first state that is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, in a state where the left and right movable members 43a and 43b are rotated in the direction away from the variable winning device 35 with the lower end portion as the center, the movable members 43a and 43b open in a reverse “C” shape. As a result, the winning space 41 is opened, and the winning to the variable winning device 35 is possible. That is, this state is a second state that is advantageous to the player. When neither the starting game state nor the special game state is set (in the normal game state and the special game standby state), the movable members 43a and 43b are kept closed (first state).

The movable members 43a and 43b are used in the special game shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. Change for a predetermined time, and then are converted into the second state in a predetermined manner by driving the first big prize opening solenoid 201 and the second big prize opening solenoid 202 (shown in FIG. 10) (so-called small hitting operation, Details will be described later), and a chance to win a prize winning device 35 is obtained. Here, the special drawings 1 and 2 are the special drawings displayed by the LEDs of the collective display device 50.
That is, based on the fact that the game balls won in the first start winning openings 33a and 33b are detected by the left start opening switch 105 and the right start opening switch 106, the special figure 1 fluctuates for a predetermined time, and the result of the stop symbol Open once or twice based on the mode. Similarly, based on the fact that the game ball won in the second start winning opening 34 is detected by the middle start opening switch 107, the special figure 2 fluctuates for a predetermined time, and is released twice in the result mode of all stop symbols. I do.
In the case of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state) and opened in a predetermined manner after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, 0.5 seconds have elapsed). The operation is performed once. Further, in the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a, 43b perform a predetermined mode of opening operation (here, an opening operation of 0.8 seconds) and a closing operation of a predetermined time (here, 0.8 seconds). It is supposed to be held twice.

Here, the number of times of opening is not limited to the above contents, and when the first start winning opening 33a, 33b is won, the opening may be performed only once, or the opening operation may be performed three times or more. The same applies when winning at the second start winning opening 34. When winning at the second starting winning opening 34, the opening operation is not limited to two times but may be performed three or more times with a predetermined probability. Good.
Note that the game ball that has flowed into the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35 passes through either the left large winning port switch 103 or the right large winning port switch 104 (see FIG. 11) and flows into the bridge body 80.
Specifically, the left big prize opening switch 103 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43a in the variable prize winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the first accessory device 51 having a seesaw structure. Although the left big prize port switch 103 is installed in the internal space of the variable prize device 35, it cannot be shown directly in FIG. 2, but the installation position of the left big prize port switch 103 is indicated by the tip of an arrow. It is installed in the internal space of the nearby winning device 35. The same applies to FIGS. 2 to 4.

The right big prize opening switch 104 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43b in the variable prize winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the seesaw-structured first accessory device 51. Yes. Similarly, because the right big prize opening switch 104 is installed in the internal space of the variable prize winning device 35, it cannot be shown directly in FIG. It is installed in the internal space of the variable winning device 35 in the vicinity indicated by the tip. The same applies to FIGS. 2 to 4.
The reason why the left big prize opening switch 103 and the right big prize opening switch 104 are provided is that the variable prize winning device 35 needs to have a detection function for judging that a game ball has won. A right big prize opening switch 104 is arranged.
As will be described later, a specific area switch 111 that detects a game ball that has passed through the special prize area 69 is disposed inside the variable prize apparatus 35. The special prize area 69 detects a V prize. It is an area to play, and is not a prize opening where you can get prize balls. Similarly, a right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 (see FIG. 7) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge area 70 is disposed inside the variable winning device 35 as described later. The discharge area 70 is an area for detecting a ball that has missed the V winning, and is not a winning opening for receiving a winning ball. The right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 is a switch for detecting that a ball has come out from the variable winning device 35.

Further, a left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 (see FIG. 11) is disposed inside the variable winning device 35, and the left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 flows into the hell inflow space 63 in the variable winning device 35. And has a function of detecting whether or not the sphere flowing into the hell inflow space 63 remains.
The left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 cannot be directly shown in FIG. 2 because it is installed in the hell inflow space 63 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, in the variable winning device 35. The remaining ball discharge port switch 112 is installed in the internal space of the variable winning device 35 in the vicinity indicated by the tip of the arrow. The same applies to FIGS. 2 to 4. On the other hand, the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 installed in the variable winning device 35 is directly shown in FIG.

A seesaw-type first accessory device 51 arranged below the winning space 41 has a pigeon member 52, a bat member 53, and a bridge body 80, which will be described in detail later. As shown in FIG. 6 to be described later, the bridge body 80 is configured to be swingable to the left and right like a seesaw with the substantially center of the bridge body 80 as a fulcrum. When the game ball that has flowed into the winning space 41 at the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b are opened, contacts the bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51 having the seesaw structure, the game is caused by the inclination of the bridge body 80. The sphere flows into any of the left and right inflow spaces (the heaven inflow space 62 and the hell inflow space 63).
Here, when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 1, the right inflow space is referred to as heaven inflow space 62 (also referred to as heaven zone), and the left inflow space is referred to as hell inflow space 63 (also referred to as hell zone).
The pigeon member 52 arranged in the seesaw structure first device 51 has a function of preventing the game ball in contact with the bridge body 80 from flowing to the heaven inflow space 62 side, while the seesaw structure The bat member 53 disposed in the first accessory device 51 has a function of preventing the game ball in contact with the bridge body 80 from flowing toward the hell inflow space 63 side. As a result, the game ball flows into the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63 while the game ball in contact with the bridge body 80 is pounded by the function of the pigeon member 52 and the bat member 53. Can enjoy.
However, as described above, in this embodiment, there is a possibility of a big hit only when the game ball has advanced to the right heaven inflow space 62. Therefore, in the start game based on the establishment of the start condition, the game ball May be prevented from operating the pigeon member 52 that obstructs the flow to the heaven inflow space 62 side. With such a configuration, the possibility of a big hit is increased, and the player's willingness to play can be further increased.

An angel member 64 decorated with an angel-like decoration corresponding to the heaven inflow space 62 is arranged on the right side portion of the variable winning device 35, and a pattern labeled “HEAVEN” is changed below the angel member 64. The winning device 35 is provided.
On the other hand, a devil member 65 decorated with a devil-like decoration corresponding to the hell inflow space 63 is disposed on the left side portion of the variable prize winning device 35, and a pattern labeled “HELL” is provided below the devil member 65. Is applied to the variable winning device 35.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, a heavenly accessory device 66 is provided in the heaven inflow space 62 disposed in the right side portion of the variable winning device 35. The heavenly performing apparatus 66 includes a heavenly rotating body 67, and the heavenly rotating body 67 is formed with a plurality of V winning recesses 68a and 68b. When the ball that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 fits and is supported by any of the V winning ball recesses 68a and 68b, the ball falls into the special winning area 69 (see FIG. 7) and the big win lottery starts. It has come to be.
As described above, a specific area switch 111 (see FIG. 7) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the special prize area 69 is arranged inside the variable prize apparatus 35, and the game ball passes through the special prize area 69. When the specific area switch 111 detects that it has passed, a big win lottery is performed as a V prize. However, the specific area switch 111 is for detecting a V prize when the game ball passes through the special prize area 69, and does not become a prize for receiving a prize ball. It is for detecting.
And in the jackpot lottery, all the lotteries are 16 round jackpots, but not all jackpots can win the same prize ball, for example, the jackpot that can win 16 rounds of prize balls, equivalent to 7 rounds A lottery is performed in which one of the big hits that can be won by the prize balls is determined. Hereinafter, these are referred to as “16R big hit”, “per 7R”, and “per 3R”.
In addition, in a pachinko machine of a type belonging to a so-called feather object (including the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment), the winning in the special winning area 69 in the start game is counted as one round, so that the actual big hit (special game state) The number of inside rounds is reduced by one round. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the result of subtracting only one round from the 16 rounds in relation to the appearance, and all 15 round games are played.

On the other hand, if the sphere flowing into the heaven inflow space 62 does not fit into any of the V winning recesses 68a and 68b, the sphere does not fall into the special winning area 69 but passes through the remaining sphere discharging area 70 and fluctuates. It is discharged from the winning device 35.
Also, as described above, the board effect device 46 is provided on the lower side of the game board 30 and below the first accessory device 51. When the start condition is satisfied and the game ball falls into the special winning area 69 of the variable winning device 35, the board effect device 46 performs an effect corresponding to the big win lottery result, “16R big hit”, “per 7R”, “ One of the three modes “per 3R” is displayed.
Specifically, in the board effect device 46, the game balls that flow into the winning space 41 at the timing when the movable members 43a, 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened and the start condition is established are the seesaw-structured first accessory device 51. And then flows into the heaven inflow space 62 and is supported by being fitted in and supported by any of the V winning ball recesses 68a and 68b of the heaven rotating body 67 in the heavenly acting device 66, and then the ball is in the special winning area 69 (see FIG. 7). ) Is a big hit (special gaming state) and the lottery effect of the round is started, and according to the lottery result, among the three modes of “16R big hit”, “per 7R”, and “per 3R” An effect display that stops at any one of these is performed (detailed configuration will be described later).
However, the number of rounds that will be a big hit is determined in advance based on the random number value extracted when winning at the first start winning opening 33a, 33b or the second starting winning opening 34. As in the case of the game, it is determined based on the result pattern of the special symbol (special symbol display in the collective display device 50). The lottery effect of the round here is performed based on the result determined in advance.

In this way, when a game ball wins in the special winning area 69, as described above, the "16R big hit", "per 7R", "per 3R" determined in advance based on the random number value extracted when the starting win is won. "Is a big hit (special gaming state).
In the special game state, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened and closed to perform the operation to intermittently enter the second state, and the movable members 43a and 43b are opened and closed a predetermined number of times (for example, 18 times) A cycle game in which the opening and closing of the movable members 43a and 43b until one of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is achieved is defined as one round, and this is repeated a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times). Done.
Accordingly, winning in the variable winning device 35 is facilitated, and it is possible to obtain a lot of game balls as award balls for the player.
Here, the number of rounds that can be repeated is not determined in advance based on the random number extracted when the start winning is made as described above, but is selected by lottery when the special winning area 69 is won in the starting game, for example. It may be determined (for example, any of 3, 7, 16 times), or on the condition that the special winning area 69 is won during the round, with the maximum number of rounds (for example, 16 times) as the limit. You may make it advance to a round.
In addition, by combining the above-described conditions, it is possible to advance to the next round if a special winning area 69 is won during the round up to the determined maximum number of repeatable rounds.
Also, at this time, the game control device 100 controls the heavenly accessory device 66 by the later-described accessory motor 72 and the second motor switch 71, so that the game ball is likely to win the special winning area 69 or conversely. It may be difficult to adjust the number of rounds that can be continued.

Here, for the convenience of explanation, the detailed structure of the heavenly agent device 66 (guidance device) will be described first.
FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the structure of the heavenly accessory device 66.
In FIG. 7, the heavenly accessory device 66 includes a heavenly rotating body 67, a second motor switch 71, and an accessory motor 72. When the accessory motor 72 rotates, the power of the heavenly accessory device 66 is changed to a plurality of gears 73a to 73c. To the drive shaft 74 of the heavenly rotating body 67, and the heavenly rotating body 67 rotates at a constant speed (for example, clockwise rotation direction). 73d is also a gear.
The second motor switch 71 is for detecting the initial position of the heavenly rotating body 67 in the heavenly agent device 66 and includes a light shielding plate 76. That is, the second motor switch 71 is provided with a light shielding plate 76 that stands up against a support of the gear 73d (a cross of the cross inside the gear 73d). In the state of FIG. Is a state in which the second motor switch 71 is shielded from light. In this state, one of the V winning recesses 68a and 68b is above the special winning area 69. For example, if this state is the initial position of the heavenly rotating body 67, the second motor switch 71 detects the initial position based on whether or not light is blocked.

The heavenly rotating body 67 is formed in a disc shape, has two V winning recesses 68a and 68b, and a part other than the V winning recesses 68a and 68b is formed with an inflow space 75.
When the ball that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 is fitted and supported in any of the V winning recesses 68a and 68b, the ball is configured to fall into the special winning area 69. A sphere passing through the region 69 is detected by the specific region switch 111.
For example, when the V winning recesses 68a and 68b come to the front of the special winning area 69 so that the sphere flowing into the heaven inflow space 62 fits into any of the V winning recesses 68a and 68b to facilitate the V winning. You may make it the structure which pauses only for predetermined time. By doing so, the player can have a feeling of excitement and can increase the expectation for the big hit.
On the other hand, if the sphere flowing into the heaven inflow space 62 does not fit into any of the V winning recesses 68a and 68b, the sphere flows out into the inflow space 75 and passes through the remaining sphere discharge area 70. At this time, the sphere passing through the remaining sphere discharge area 70 is detected by the right remaining sphere discharge switch 113.
The balls that have passed through the special winning area 69 finally pass through the right remaining ball discharge switch 113, and the balls that have passed through the special winning area 69 are also detected by the right remaining ball discharge switch 113. Accordingly, the right remaining sphere discharge switch 113 has a function of detecting whether or not a sphere that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 remains.
In addition, the game ball that has flowed into the hell inflow space 63 is detected by the left remaining ball discharge switch 112, and therefore, the left remaining ball discharge switch 112 has no ball flowing into the hell inflow space 63 remaining. There is a function to detect whether or not.

Next, the detailed configuration of the first accessory device 51 having a seesaw structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6.
FIG. 5A is a front view of the first accessory device 51, and FIG. 5B is a perspective view of the first accessory device 51. In these drawings, the first accessory device 51 includes the aforementioned bridge body 80, pigeon member 52, bat member 53, accessory motor 81, first motor switch 82, accessory solenoid mounting portion 83, accessory solenoid mounting. A portion 84 is provided.
An accessory solenoid 203 (FIG. 10) is attached to the accessory solenoid mounting portion 83, and the accessory solenoid 203 drives the pigeon member 52 up and down. Further, an accessory solenoid 204 (FIG. 10) is attached to the accessory solenoid mounting portion 84, and the accessory solenoid 204 drives the bat member 53 up and down.

The accessory motor 81 drives the bridge main body 80 so as to swing from side to side like a seesaw with the substantially center as a fulcrum. Specifically, a support member 85 extending toward the accessory motor 81 is connected to the bridge body 80, and a long hole 86 is formed at the end of the support member 85. A cylindrical pin 87 communicates. The pin 87 is connected to the accessory motor 81 through the drive mechanism 88.
The accessory motor 81 can rotate about 100 degrees in the forward rotation (for example, clockwise rotation) and the reverse rotation (for example, counterclockwise rotation). When the accessory motor 81 rotates in the forward direction, the accessory motor 81 is rotated. Is transmitted to the pin 87 through the drive mechanism 88, and the pin 87 moves in the horizontal direction in the long hole 86 communicating with the pin 87, so that the support member 85 forming the long hole 86 is formed. Swings to the left and right like a seesaw with the approximate center of the bridge body 80 as a fulcrum, so that the bridge body 80 connected to the support member 85 swings to the left and right like a seesaw with the approximately center as a fulcrum ( That is, each end of the bridge main body 80 moves up and down like a seesaw.) Also, when the accessory motor 81 rotates in the reverse direction, each end of the bridge main body 80 is also a seesaw. like It moves downward.
It should be noted that depending on whether the accessory motor 81 rotates forward or backward, it is determined in which direction each end of the bridge body 80 is inclined. For example, when the accessory motor 81 rotates forward, the seesaw is tilted so that the right end portion of the bridge body 80 faces downward. At this time, the game ball that rolls in contact with the bridge main body 80 easily flows into the heaven inflow space 62. On the other hand, for example, when the accessory motor 81 rotates in the reverse direction, it is driven into a seesaw state inclined so that the left end portion of the bridge main body 80 faces down. At this time, the game ball that rolls in contact with the bridge main body 80 easily flows into the hell inflow space 63.

The first motor switch 82 detects whether the accessory motor 81 tilts the bridge body 80 left or right. When the bridge main body 80 is not inclined to the left or right and is substantially horizontal, the support member 85 connected to the bridge main body 80 is in a substantially vertical state, and at this time, the first motor switch 82 is in a light shielding state. ing. Therefore, at this time, the first motor switch 82 has a signal form corresponding to the light shielding state (for example, a form in which the signal is turned on because it is in the light shielding state).
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6A, when the support member 85 connected to the bridge body 80 is driven in a tilted state (right tilted state) so that the right end of the bridge body 80 is down. The first motor switch 82 outputs a signal for switching from light shielding to light passing. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, when the support member 85 connected to the bridge body 80 is driven in a tilted state (left tilted state) so that the left end portion of the bridge body 80 is down. In addition, the first motor switch 82 outputs a signal for switching from light shielding to light passing.
Therefore, by monitoring the rotation direction of the accessory motor 81 and the signal form of the first motor switch 82, it is possible to detect whether the bridge body 80 is inclined to the left or right.

Next, the detailed structure of the board production | presentation apparatus 46 arrange | positioned under the 1st accessory apparatus 51 in the variable prize-winning apparatus 35 is demonstrated with reference to FIG.8 and FIG.9.
The board directing device 46 has a function as a round lottery and includes a V jackpot display unit 211, a heart jackpot display unit 212, and a star jackpot display unit 213, as shown in FIG. 211 to 213 are configured to be divided into three by a wall member around one axis, and are rotatable around the axis (see FIG. 9).
Then, when the game control device 100 starts the big win lottery and the lottery result is transmitted to the production control device 300, the production control device 300 controls the board production device 46 in accordance with the lottery result and displays the V big win display. Any one of the part 211, the heart jackpot display part 212, and the star jackpot display part 213 is directed to the front so that the player is informed of the current jackpot.

FIG. 8A shows a state in which the V big hit display unit 211 is selected under the control of the effect control device 300 and faces the front. When the V jackpot display unit 211 is selected, the “16R jackpot” jackpot game is started. In this case, the V big hit display unit 211 has a configuration imitating the shape of “V”, and the “V” portion is configured to shine in gold. The information display unit 45 described above is arranged below the V jackpot display unit 211. When a big hit occurs, a big hit round display or the like is performed. In addition, since the information display 45 is rotated and fixed, even when the heart big hit display unit 212 or the star big hit display unit 213 is selected and turned to the front, the information display 45 is as shown in FIG. It is in the same position.
FIG. 8B shows a state in which the heart big hit display unit 212 is selected under the control of the effect control device 300 and faces the front. When the heart big hit display unit 212 is selected, a big hit game of “per 7R” is started. In this case, the heart big hit display portion 212 has a configuration imitating the shape of a “heart”, and the “heart” portion is formed in red. Even when the heart jackpot display unit 212 is selected, the player may be promoted to a V jackpot equivalent to “16R jackpot” during the round effect or the interval effect.
FIG. 8C shows a state in which the star big hit display unit 213 is selected under the control of the effect control device 300 and faces the front. When the star big hit display unit 213 is selected, the big hit game of “per 3R” is started. In this case, the star big hit display portion 213 has a configuration imitating the shape of a “star (star)”, and the “star” portion is formed in blue. Even when the star jackpot display unit 213 is selected, it may be promoted to a V jackpot equivalent to “16R jackpot” or a heart jackpot equivalent to “per 7R” during a round effect or an interval effect.

  Here, as a breakdown of the big hit, “16R big hit” is selected when the V big hit display unit 211 is selected, “per 7R” is selected when the heart big hit display unit 212 is selected, and “star big hit display unit 213 is selected”. 3R ”, but the game that determines the big hit (that is, the first game for performing the big hit lottery) is also counted as one round. In the round game, “per 7R”, 6 rounds are played, and in “3R”, 2 rounds are played.

Next, FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of the board effect device 46.
As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (e), the board effect device 46 has a V jackpot display unit 211, a heart jackpot display unit 212, and a star jackpot display unit 213 having three display units 211 to 213 as one axis. It is configured to be divided into three parts by a wall member 91 around 90, and is rotatable around an axis 90 (see FIG. 9). The wall member 91 is fixed to the shaft 90. Each of the display units 211 to 213 is divided into three sections by a wall member 91.
The detailed structure will be described with reference to FIG. 9B. In FIG. 9B, the board effect device 46 includes a V jackpot display unit 211, a heart jackpot display unit 212, a star jackpot display unit 213, a shaft 90, and a wall member. In addition to 91, an effect motor 92, a first effect motor switch 93, a second effect motor switch 94, and gears 95a to 95c are provided. In addition, the board effect device 46 includes light shielding plates 96a and 96b as shown in FIG.

The effect motor 92 provides driving force for rotating the V big hit display unit 211, the heart big hit display unit 212, and the star big hit display unit 213 divided into three by the wall member 91. The force is transmitted to the shaft 90 sequentially through the gears 95a to 95c, so that the shaft 90 rotates. Since the wall member 91 is fixed to the shaft 90, eventually, when the effect motor 92 rotates, the shaft 90 rotates and the wall member 91 also rotates, and stops at a predetermined position according to the current big hit lottery result, Any one of the V jackpot display unit 211, the heart jackpot display unit 212, and the star jackpot display unit 213 faces the front and performs an effect of notifying the player of the current jackpot.
The first effect motor switch 93 and the second effect motor switch 94 are for detecting the stop positions of the V jackpot display unit 211, the heart jackpot display unit 212, and the star jackpot display unit 213, and are as follows, for example. ing.
(A) When both the first effect motor switch 93 and the second effect motor switch 94 detect the light shielding state, the V big hit display unit 211 is in a state of facing the front.
(B) When the first effect motor switch 93 is in the light-transmitting state and only the second effect motor switch 94 is detecting the light-shielding state, the heart big hit display unit 212 is in a state of facing the front.
(C) When only the first effect motor switch 93 detects the light blocking state and the second effect motor switch 94 is in the light-transmitting state, the star big hit display unit 213 is in a state of facing the front.

  In addition, the effect motor 92 is driven and controlled to rotate in the order of “V big hit display unit 211” → “heart big hit display unit 212” → “star big hit display unit 213”. However, in this case, it is possible to drive and control the effect motor 92 in reverse rotation, and any one (or all) of the “V big hit display unit 211”, the “heart big hit display unit 212”, and the “star big hit display unit 213”. It is also possible to drive and control the effect motor 92 so as to make a motion that sways. When such control is performed, it is possible to produce a wider variety of effects by the board effect device 46.

C. Configuration of Control System Next, the control system of the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it is difficult to show the illustration, and therefore, the drawing may be appropriately shortened (illustrated).
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, and a power supply device 400 as main components of the control system.

(Game control device related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and includes a CPU unit 170 having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 171 and an input having an input port. And a data bus 150 that connects the CPU unit 170, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130, and the like.
Here, the game control device 100 corresponds to a control device, and constitutes an opening control means, a change time selection means, a special figure change control means, and a change time storage means.

  The CPU section 170 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 171 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and a clock used as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 173 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. And a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 171 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal and reset for notifying the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in this embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 171 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 127. When this RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 171C in the gaming microcomputer 171 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 171. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 171 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 171A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 171B, and an RA that can be read and written as needed.
M (random access memory) 171C is provided.
The ROM 171B stores non-changeable information (program, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 171C stores a work area for the CPU 171A and various signal and random value storage areas during game control. Used as As the ROM 171B or the RAM 171C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used. The ROM 171B constitutes a variable time storage unit.

In addition, the ROM 171B stores, for example, a variation pattern distribution table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. . For example, as shown in FIG. 73 which will be described later, the variation pattern distribution table is a time setting for the first and second ward actor devices 51 and 66, and a one-time opening symbol of the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35. It is a table for the CPU 171A to refer to patterns such as a symbol distribution rate that is opened twice to determine a variation pattern.
The fluctuation pattern distribution table includes a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern table selected when the special figure 1 fluctuates, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern table selected when the special figure 2 fluctuates, and the like.
In this embodiment, unlike the one type of gaming machine, since it is a so-called feather type gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), for example, the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state or the fluctuation pattern before entering the reach state. There is no table or the like for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, and all the special figure fluctuation results are small hits and there is no losing. That is, when the start prize is won, the opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable prize winning device 35 is always performed. And it becomes the structure from which the frequency | count of opening of movable member 43a, 43b differs by the stop symbol difference of a special figure.

Here, the reach (reach state) includes a display device that can change the display state (for example, the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display of the collective display device 50). When a plurality of display results are derived and displayed and the plurality of display results are in a predetermined special result mode, the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (starting gaming state or special gaming state). In the pachinko machine 1, it means a state of a special figure fluctuation display game that is executed with a low frequency and is executed for a longer time than the average special figure fluctuation display game.
In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Further, for example, a state in which a variable display by a plurality of variable display regions is maintained (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state where the special result mode is different is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

In addition, the special display variation display game may be executed on another display device (for example, the information display unit 45) in correspondence with the special display variation display game.
Thus, for example, a decoration special figure variation display game displays a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined period of time in each of the left and right variation display areas on the display device, and then stops the variation display in the order of left and right. In the left fluctuation display area, the state in which the fluctuation display is stopped in a state that satisfies the condition for the special result mode (for example, “3”, “5”, or “7”) is reached. It becomes a state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the reach state (except for the special result mode) to the reach state, and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from the reach state.
This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special reach (SP reach), premier Reach is set.

The CPU 171A executes a game control program in the ROM 171B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or a solenoid (for example, a big prize opening solenoid 201) or a display device ( For example, a drive signal for the collective display device 50) is generated and output to control the entire pachinko machine 1.
Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 171 uses a special symbol random number for determining the special symbol small hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special symbol variation display game (variable display game in the variation display with various reach and no reach). A random number generation circuit for generating a fluctuation pattern random number and the like for determining an execution time and the like, and a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 171A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 173 ) Timer interrupt signal and a clock generator for generating a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit.

  Further, the CPU 171A obtains any one variation pattern distribution table from among the plurality of variation pattern distribution tables stored in the ROM 171B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 171A selects and acquires any one variation pattern distribution table from among a plurality of variation pattern distribution tables based on the game result of the special figure variation display game, the start memory number, and the like. To do. Here, when the CPU 171A executes the special figure variation display game, the CPU 171A includes a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern distribution tables stored in the ROM 171B. Eggplant.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.
Furthermore, when the payout control device 200 receives the launch permission signal from the game control device 100 through serial communication, the payout control device 200 outputs this launch permission signal to the launch control device (not shown). Thereby, the launch of the game ball is permitted.
The launch control device receives supply of necessary power from the payout control device 200, and receives a launch permission signal and a power failure detection signal. The launch control device controls a launch motor (not shown) that launches a game ball in accordance with the operation of the launch operation handle 11, and the launch control device includes a touch switch signal from the touch panel 16 and a signal from a launch stop switch (not shown). Is entered. The touch switch signal detects whether or not the player is touching the launch operation handle 11, and the launch stop switch temporarily stops the launch of the game ball and is operated by the player. is there.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 171 includes a gate switch 101, a winning opening switch 102, a left large winning opening switch 103, a right large winning opening switch 104, a left starting opening switch 105, a right starting opening switch 106, and a middle starting opening switch. 107, a specific area switch 111, a left remaining sphere outlet switch 112, a right remaining sphere outlet switch 113, an effect switch 108, and a panel radio wave sensor 114. The high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. Interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b are provided that receive a negative logic signal such as the above and convert it to a 0V-5V positive logic signal.
Here, the gate switch 101 is a switch that detects a game ball that has passed through the starting gate of the normal symbol, but in this embodiment, since this is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) that does not have a common figure, this switch exists. Instead, it is GND-connected on an external relay board (not shown). Therefore, in FIG. 10, it is shown as a gate switch (GND connection).
In addition, as shown in FIG. 10, when a relay board 151 having an electrical pattern for outputting a test signal (for example, a gate passing signal 1 according to the normal symbol 1) to be output to the test firing test apparatus is connected, In the embodiment, this test signal is always output as OFF. Although such a configuration seems to be useless at first glance, this game control device 100 is commonly used when developing a single-wing game machine having a normal symbol and its starting gate as another model. There is a big merit that you can.
Further, as described above, the winning opening switch 102 detects game balls won in the general winning openings 36a and 36b of the game board 30, and 1 to n are provided according to the number of general winning openings. The left big winning port switch 103 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43a in the variable winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the first accessory device 51 having a seesaw structure. Similarly, the right big prize opening switch 104 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43b in the variable prize winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the first accessory device 51 having a seesaw structure.
That is, the left big prize opening switch 103 and the right big prize opening switch 104 function as a prize opening switch for detecting a game ball won to the variable prize winning device 35 which is a big prize opening.

The left start opening switch 105 detects a game ball won in the first start winning opening 33a of the game board 30. The right start opening switch 106 detects a game ball won in the first start winning opening 33b. The middle start opening switch 107 detects a game ball won in the second start winning opening 34. The effect switch 108 is disposed in a space immediately before the game ball enters the heavenly-working device 66 in the variable winning device 35. When the game ball passes through the effect switch 108, the V of the heavenly rotating body 67 of the heavenly-working device 66 is displayed. The inflow effect of the heavenly instrument device 66 is performed to make the player expect the ball to fit into the winning recesses 68a and 68b.
As shown in FIG. 7, the specific area switch 111 detects that the game ball that has flowed into the heavenly grant apparatus 66 has passed through the special prize area 69. In this case, if the ball that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 of the heavenly performing apparatus 66 fits into one of the V winning recesses 68a and 68b and is supported, and then falls into the special winning area 69, a big hit occurs. It will be.
The left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 detects a game ball that has flowed into the hell inflow space 63 of the heavenly agent device 66, and has a function of detecting whether or not the ball that has flowed into the hell inflow space 63 remains. Have. Similarly, the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detects both a game ball that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 of the heavenly agent device 66 and passed through the remaining ball discharge area 70 and a game ball that has passed through the special winning area 69. Therefore, it has a function of detecting whether or not a sphere that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 remains.
The board radio wave sensor 114 detects the emission of radio waves (for example, unauthorized radio waves) to the pachinko machine 1, and a plurality of board radio wave sensors may be arranged. In that case, 1 to m pieces are provided.

The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.
The reason why the proximity I / F 121a and the proximity I / F 121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The proximity I / F 121b is made smaller than the proximity I / F 121a in accordance with the number of input terminals that are insufficient, thereby reducing the cost. Note that the proximity I / F 121a having a necessary number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided.

The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 162, the third input port 163, or the fourth input port 164 and read into the gaming microcomputer 171 through the data bus 150. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the gate switch 101, the winning port switch 102, the left large winning port switch 103, the right large winning port switch 104, the left starting port switch 105, the right starting port switch 106, and the middle A detection signal of the start port switch 107 is input to the second input port 162.
Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, detection signals from the specific area switch 111, the left remaining sphere outlet switch 112, the right remaining sphere outlet switch 113, and the effect switch 15a are input to the fourth input port 164. .
Further, signals from the first motor switch 82 and the second motor switch 71 are input to the fourth input port 164. The first motor switch 82 detects whether the accessory motor 81 in the first accessory device 51 is tilting the bridge body 80 left or right. The second motor switch 71 detects the initial position of the heavenly rotating body 67 in the heavenly-working device 66.

Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a, the abnormality detection signal 1 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 163, and the output of the proximity I / F 121b includes the panel radio wave sensor. The detection signal 114 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are also input to the third input port 163.
In addition, detection signals from the magnetic sensor 115 and the vibration sensor 116 are input to the third input port 163, and a fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 4 emits radio waves). And a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command).
The magnetic sensor 115 detects illegal magnetism, and is arranged in the vicinity of the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 or the proximity sensor, and a plurality of (for example, 1 to k pieces) so as to cover a place where the magnet can be applied. ) Is provided. The vibration sensor 116 detects improper vibration, and one vibration sensor 116 is arranged on a so-called veneer plate on the back side of the variable winning device 35 as a center case.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 162 and the part of the output to the fourth input port 164 are not shown through the relay board 151 from the game control device 100. It is also supplied to test equipment. Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, detection signals of the left start port switch 105, the right start port switch 106, and the middle start port switch 107 are input to the gaming microcomputer 171 in addition to the second input port 162. It is configured as follows.
As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.
The data held in the second input port 162 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 171 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 162. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 163, the fourth input port 164, and the first input port 161 described later.

The first input port 161 is supplied with detection signals from a glass frame open detection switch 117 that detects the opening of the glass frame 5 and a main body frame open detection switch 118 that detects the opening of the front frame 4, and the payout control device 200. Payout abnormal status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball cut switch signal (signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (more than a predetermined amount of game balls are stored in the lower plate 10) (A signal output when it is detected that the camera is full), a touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the firing operation handle 11), and Schmitt Signals from the buffer 126 and the RAM initialization switch 127 are input.
The first input port 161 captures each signal and supplies it to the game microcomputer 171 via the data bus 150.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with the Schmitt buffer 126 described above for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 171 and the like. Has a function of removing noise from the input signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 127 are once input to the first input port 161 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 171 via the data bus 150. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 171 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 126 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 171 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 151 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 151 for output to the test board 151. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 151.
The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 161, 162, 163, 164 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 171 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 171 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 171 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 171 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 171 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 150 and is connected to the data bus 150. A special change in accordance with a start prize (a prize to the first start prize port 33a, 23b or the second start prize port 34) to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization not shown. A buffer 133 that outputs special map information of the display game via the relay board 151 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay substrate 151 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 115 and the panel radio wave sensor 114, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 171 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 150 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 151. The relay board 151 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 171 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 151, and the signal of the port that is selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 150 and opens and closes the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35. The first big winning port solenoid 201, the second big winning port solenoid 203, and the first role. A second solenoid for outputting opening / closing data of the accessory solenoid 203 for driving the pigeon member 52 up and down in the article device 51 and the accessory solenoid 204 for driving up and down the bat member 53 in the first accessory device 51. An output port 134 is provided.
Further, the output unit 130 includes a fifth output port 137 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A sixth output port 138 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is also provided with a seventh output port 139 and a sixth output port 138 for outputting information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 152. The external information terminal board 152 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the seventh output port 139 to the dispensing control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a first big prize opening solenoid 201, a second big prize opening solenoid 203, and a second big prize opening solenoid 203, which open and close the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 output from the second output port 134, respectively. A solenoid that receives an opening / closing data signal of an accessory solenoid 203 for driving the pigeon member 52 in the first accessory device 51 up and down, and an accessory solenoid 204 for driving the bat member 53 in the first accessory device 51 up and down. The first driver (driving circuit) 140 that generates and outputs a drive signal, the accessory motor 72 in the heavenly accessory device 66 that is output from the third output port 135, and the bridge body 80 in the first accessory device 51 are seen left and right. The second door that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the opening / closing data signal of the accessory motor 81 that is driven up and down as shown in FIG. Driver (drive circuit) 141, a third driver 142 for outputting an ON / OFF drive signals of the current supply side of the segment lines of the connected monitor LED153 outputted from the fourth output port 136 is provided.
Here, the connection monitor LED 153 is turned on when the game control device 100 as the main board is activated, and has a function of monitoring that the main board is in operation. In addition, when the number of parts to be operated by the game control device 100 increases in the future, there is an advantage that the fourth output port 136 can be used corresponding to the increased number of parts.
The connection monitor LEDs 153 may be connected in a number corresponding to the signal lines output from the fourth output port 136 on a one-to-one basis, or may be connected to a plurality of signal lines. Also good.
Further, the output unit 130 outputs from the fourth driver 143 and the sixth output port 138 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the fifth output port 137. An external information signal supplied from the fifth driver 144, the seventh output port 139, and the sixth output port 138 that outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 to an external device such as a management device Is output to the external information terminal board 152. A sixth driver 145 is provided.

The first driver 140 has a power supply voltage so that it can drive solenoids operating at 32 V (first big prize opening solenoid 201, second big prize opening solenoid 202, combination solenoid 203, combination solenoid 204). DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400. Further, the second driver 141 is supplied with DC 12V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that motors operating at 12V (the accessory motor 72 and the accessory motor 81) can be driven. Similarly, the third driver 142 is supplied with DC12V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that the connection monitor LED 153 operating at 12V can be driven.
Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the fourth driver 143 that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the fifth driver 144 for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The fourth driver 143 that outputs 12V causes a current to flow to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the fifth driver 144 that outputs the ground potential draws the current from the cathode terminal via the segment line. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The sixth driver 145 that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 152 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 140, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 151 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 146 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 146 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 171 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection apparatus 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 171 as in a general general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 161, 162, 163, 164 are provided. Absent.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
Here, in the first embodiment, under the control of the effect control device 300, an information display 45 provided with LEDs is arranged below the center case of the game board 30. Although round display etc. are performed, FIG. 11 shows an example in which a liquid crystal information display device 451 using liquid crystal is employed instead of the information display 45 provided with LEDs as a modification of the first embodiment.
In the following description, the configuration using the liquid crystal information display device 451 will be described, and the configuration will be described with reference to the information display 45 as well.

The effect control device 300 displays an image on the liquid crystal information display device 451 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 171. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for sound and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 13a, 13b, and 13c. .
Therefore, in the example of FIG. 11, in the configuration employing the liquid crystal information display device 451, the liquid crystal information display device 451 includes various image displays under the control of the VDP 312 according to the command from the effect control device 300, and displays various game states. It will be a big hit round display, etc., it is possible to perform powerful and diverse productions.
In FIG. 11, when the information display device 45 including LEDs is used instead of the liquid crystal information display device 451 (the case of the first embodiment), a circuit similar to the board decoration LED control circuit 332 described later is used. Or, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 10, an output port and a driver are arranged on the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 via the address / data bus 340 and connected to the information display 45. do it.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 171, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, turns on the decoration lamp, And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.
Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the liquid crystal information display device 451 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 5 and the game board 30 is provided. A synchronization signal STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.
The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the liquid crystal information display device 451 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the liquid crystal information display device via the signal conversion circuit 313. 451 is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speakers 13a and 13b provided on the glass frame 5 and the lower speaker 13c provided on the operation panel 6, and a sound source The sound generated by the LSI 314 is output from the upper speakers 13a and 13b and the lower speaker 13c via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command (effect command) transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 171 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 351 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the variable prize device 35 as a center case). The frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling the frame decoration device 352 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 5, and the game board 30 (including the variable winning device 35 as the center case) are provided. A board production movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the board production device 46 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 5, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 15 a built in the effect button 15 provided on the operation panel 6, a touch panel 16 provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 15, and the board effect device 46. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect motor switches 93 and 94 for detecting the initial position of the effect motor 92 and the like, and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the volume control provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the switch 335 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. DC32V, liquid crystal information display device 451 comprising a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for command I / F 331, DC15V voltage for driving a motor, LED, or speaker Is configured to generate Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), sound source LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps and motors, etc., are output from main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. The effect control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 47 that cools various portions of the pachinko machine 1, and the cooling FAN 47 is driven when the effect control device 300 is powered on.

D. Operation of Control System Next, control of the pachinko machine 1 (game machine) that performs such a game will be described.
First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 171 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 171 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 and timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 15 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main process of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 171) will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main process starts based on the fact that the gaming microcomputer 171 is forcibly reset. That is, when a power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 400 is turned on, a reset signal from the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is sent at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the gaming microcomputer 171 is turned on and the reset signal is released, the gaming microcomputer 171 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the game signal is released after the reset signal is turned on and the gaming microcomputer 171 is activated. Further, when the worker wants to initialize the user work RAM or the like of the game control device 100, it is necessary to turn on the power switch while turning on the RAM initialization switch 127.

When the gaming microcomputer 171 is activated, first, a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then a stack for setting a stack pointer that is a start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs. A pointer setting process (step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4).
In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 161) is read (step S6), and a process for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  Further, the power-on delay timer is measured using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not a target for RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that the initialization switch signal is input to the input port 1 (first input port 161), and the state of the input port 1 (first input port 161) is read before the start of the standby time. The operation of the RAM initialization switch 127 can be reliably detected. That is, when the state of the RAM initialization switch 127 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or until the standby time elapses after the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue operating 127. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; YES), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; NO), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9).
If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step S10; YES), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited for to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; NO), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; NO), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; YES), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).
In this embodiment, the RWM indicates the RAM 171C. However, the RWM is not limited to the RAM, and a read / write storage element such as an EEPROM may be used as the RWM.

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 171 and used in this embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. From the state of the input port 1 (first input port 161), it is determined whether or not the initialization switch (RAM initialization switch 127; hereinafter the same) is turned on (step S16).
When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; NO), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; YES), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; YES), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; YES), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; YES), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; NO or step S18; NO). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; NO), the process proceeds to step S406 in FIG. 13 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step S21 of FIG. 13, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.
Next, the number of ball biting processes in the motor control areas 1 and 2 is cleared to “0” (step S22). In this process, it is determined whether or not the accessory motor 72 that drives the heavenly rotating body 67 of the heavenly agent device 66 has caused the ball bite, and when the ball bite has occurred, it is avoided. In addition, the number of times of counting the above process is cleared to “0” in advance, and whether or not the accessory motor 81 that drives the bridge body 80 in the first accessory device 51 having the seesaw structure has caused the ball engagement. When the ball is bitten, the number of times of counting the processing for avoiding it is cleared to “0” in advance.
Here, the motor control area 1 corresponds to the accessory motor 81, and the motor control area 2 corresponds to the accessory motor 72.

This background will be described.
For convenience of explanation, first, the accessory motor 81 will be described first.
When the starting condition is satisfied and the game balls flow into the first winning device 51 into the winning space 41 at the timing when the movable members 43 a and 43 b of the variable winning device 35 are opened, the gaming balls are stored in the first winning device 51. It rolls in contact with the bridge body 80 and flows into either the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63. In this process, the game ball is driven by the accessory motor 81 and the first accessory device 51. It may be pinched between the inner wall surface and the like, and may make a solitary sound, causing so-called ball biting.
If the ball bite occurs, for example, by rotating the accessory motor 81 in the reverse direction to increase the distance between the bridge body 80 and the inner wall surface of the first accessory device 51, etc. Is often resolved.
On the other hand, when a game ball flows into the heavenly agent device 66, the game ball rolls on the heavenly rotating body 67 and either fits into the V winning recesses 68a and 68b or does not fit. Thus, the game ball may be pinched between the heavenly rotating body 67 driven by the accessory motor 72 and the inner wall surface of the heavenly accessory device 66 and make a so-called ball engagement.
When the ball bite is caused, for example, by rotating the accessory motor 72 in the reverse direction to increase the distance between the heavenly rotating body 67 and the inner wall surface of the heavenly agent device 66, the ball bite is performed. Is often resolved.
From the above background, in step S22, the number of ball biting processes in the motor control areas 1 and 2 is cleared to “0”.

  After step S22, the power failure restoration command corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) ( Step S23), the process proceeds to step S29. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S23, a model designation command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a game state designation command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demo command if waiting for a customer, a command being restored otherwise), etc. Send multiple commands. Depending on the model, an effect number information command is also transmitted in addition to these commands.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S24, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S24), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S25), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S26). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S27). The region to be initialized here is a region relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration region and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S28), and it progresses to step S29.
In the case of the present embodiment, in step S28, a model designation command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a RAM initialization command (customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, and RAM initialization is performed with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the user). Depending on the model, an effect number information command is also transmitted in addition to these commands.

  In step S29, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 171 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 171. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 173 and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 171A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S29, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 171A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers for determining the hit pattern of the special figure) After saving the initial value (start value) of (special symbol random number) in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S31), an interrupt is permitted in step S33 as described later.
In this embodiment, the initial value random number is substantially determined by one of the special symbol random numbers. In this case, the soft random number register 1 may be prepared as a predetermined register (soft random number register). become. On the other hand, when there are a large number of random numbers to be determined for initial value random numbers, n number of predetermined registers such as soft random number registers 1 to n are prepared.
The random number generation circuit in the CPU 171A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as the initial value (start value) of the initial value random number. Thus, the regularity of random numbers generated by software can be broken, and it is difficult for a player to obtain an illegal random number.

After step S31, the ON data of the connection monitor LED 153 is output (step S32).
In this embodiment, a large number of output ports are prepared so that the game control device 100 as the main board can be used in common among different models. Specifically, the connection monitor LED 153 is connected to the fourth output port 136 via the driver 142. Incidentally, the two accessory motors 72 and the accessory motor 81 are connected to the third output port 135 via the driver 141. Thus, drive data can be output to two motors from one output port.
Therefore, in this embodiment, by arranging the fourth output port 136, if the connection monitor LED 153 is removed, two more motors can be added. Therefore, the connection monitor LED 153 is connected to the surplus output port of the current model (here, the fourth output port 136), and the motor is added while monitoring that the main board (game control device 100) is operating. Easy going.

After step S32, interrupt is permitted in step S33 as described above.
Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S34, and a process of updating the special symbol initial value random number by “+1” (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol initial value random number update process) is performed. This is because the regularity of the random numbers is destroyed by updating the special symbol initial value random numbers by “+1”. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an initial value is set to one random number (special symbol initial value random number).
Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, a random number (special symbol random number) that determines the symbol of the special symbol is generated using a random number generated by a random number generator. Has been. In addition, in the random number that determines the winning symbol of the special figure, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number makes a round. . Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached.

  After the special symbol initial value random number update process in step S34, the number (for example, twice) of checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus is set (step S35). ), It is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S36; NO), the process returns to the special symbol initial value random number update process (step S34). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the special symbol initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt (step S33) before the special symbol initial value random number update process (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the special symbol initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the interrupt process by waiting for the timer interrupt by the special symbol initial value random number update process.

  The special symbol initial value random number update process in step S34 includes a method of performing the special symbol initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process, and such a method is adopted. In some cases, in order to avoid the special symbol initial value random number update process being executed in both cases, when performing the special symbol initial value random number update process in the main process, disable the interrupt and then update the interrupt. Although it is necessary to cancel the special symbol initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing as in this embodiment, if the special symbol initial value random number update processing is performed only in the main processing, There is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before, and this has the advantage that the main processing is simplified.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S36; YES), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S35 (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S37; NO), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S36). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S37; YES), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S38), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S39) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S40), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S41). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S42) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S43), access to the RWM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S44), it waits for the power to the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) to be cut off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.
In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has the RAM 171C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 127) operable from the outside, and the initialization operation unit operated. And initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 171C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 171C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, the checksum calculation process (step S42) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address in step S51, and the number of repetitions is set in step S52. The number of repetitions is set corresponding to the number of bytes of the RWM being used. Next, after setting “0” as the calculated value in step S53, the content of the calculated value + the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value in step S54. In this way, the contents of each address are added as a calculated value. Next, in step S55, the calculation address is updated by “+1”, and in step S56, the number of repetitions is updated by “−1” to check whether the calculation is completed. In step S57, it is determined whether the calculation is completed. If the decision result in the step S57 is NO, the process returns to the step S54 to repeat the routine. When the number of repeated times is equal to the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation has been completed, and the process exits from step S57 to YES and ends the routine.
In this way, the checksum is calculated when the RWM is powered off.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 15, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 171A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 171, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 15 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S61). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S62). In step S62, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different.
Next, input processing (step S63) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on output data set in various processes, solenoids and the like (first big prize opening solenoid 201, second big prize opening solenoid 202, bonus solenoids 203 and 204, bonus motor 72, bonus motor 81) Output processing (step S64) for performing actuator drive control and the like is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device (not shown) via the payout control device 200. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating a launch permission state viewed from the payout control device 200 is also included. It is generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S65) and a random number update process 1 (step S66) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, the winning opening switch 102, the left large winning opening switch 103, the right large winning opening switch 104, the left starting opening switch 105, the right starting opening switch 106, the middle starting opening switch 107, the specific area switch 111, and the left remaining ball discharge opening switch. 112, a prize for monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the right remaining ball outlet switch 113 and the effect switch 108, and monitoring errors (such as whether the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are not opened). The mouth switch / state monitoring process (step S67) is performed.
Further, a remaining sphere monitoring process is performed (step S68). The remaining ball monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not a game ball won in the variable prize winning device 35 passes through the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63 and remains in the variable prize winning device 35. is there.
Next, a game stop error process is performed (step S69). In the game stop error process, when there is an error that stops the game (such as fraudulent radio wave), the game is stopped, while monitoring whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 127 to cancel the error. Is.

Next, it is determined whether or not an error operation is being performed (step S70). This is to determine whether an error such as radio wave fraud has occurred and is operating. If no error operation is in progress (step S70; NO), it is determined whether or not an error is waiting (step S71). On the other hand, if an error operation is being performed (step S70; YES), the process jumps to step S74.
If it is waiting for error cancellation (step S71; YES), it is determined that the error has not yet been canceled, and the process jumps to step S76. Therefore, in this case, the processes of steps S72 to S75 are not performed, the special game, the motor control of the first accessory device 51, and the heavenly accessory device 66 are not performed, and there is no game game.
On the other hand, if not waiting for error release (step S71; NO), special figure game processing is performed (step S72) and segment LED editing processing is performed (step S73). The special figure game process is a process related to the special figure variation display game. The segment LED editing process is provided in the pachinko machine 1, and the segment LED for displaying the special figure variation display game and various information about the game has a desired content. Is driven to display.

Next, a motor control process is performed to perform motor control related to the first accessory device 51 and the heavenly accessory device 66 (step S74), and a command for performing the rendering operation of the first accessory device 51 and the heavenly accessory device 66 is performed. An accessory effect command editing process is performed (step S75).
When the process proceeds from step S75 to step S76 or when the process jumps from step S71 to step S76, an abnormal discharge monitoring process is performed in step S76. This is when the game balls that flow into the first accessory device 51 and the game balls that are discharged from the first accessory device 51 are monitored, and the number of game balls that are discharged is larger than the flow of game balls that flow in. Is a process of stopping the game after judging that there is a possibility of fraud and abnormality.
Next, a fraud monitoring process is performed (step S77). This is a board for performing a process of checking a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 115 to determine whether there is an abnormality and performing a process for determining whether there is an abnormality by checking a magnet fraud monitoring or a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 114. Radio fraud monitoring is performed.

Next, a firing control process is performed (step S78). This is to save the output data of the firing stop if an error that stops the game has occurred, or save the output data of the permission to fire if such an error has not occurred. Is.
Then, an external information editing process (step S79) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.
Here, in this embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for permitting interrupts) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S62) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input process, first, the address of the input port 1, that is, the first input port 161 is prepared (step S91). In this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.
Next, in step S92, the address of the switch control area 1 in the RWM is prepared. In step S93, unused bit data is prepared, and in step S94, bit data to be inverted is prepared. For example, since the RAM initialization switch 127 needs to invert the detection signal, bit data for such a sensor / switch is prepared.
Here, unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port. The names in the flowchart are the same for bit data, but unused bit data and inverted bit data are different. However, the data may have the same value as a result.

In step S95, switch read processing is performed for input port 1 (first input port 161).
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 161) are as follows.
・ Glass frame open detection switch 117 (bit 0)
-Body frame open detection switch 118 (bit 1)
RAM initialization switch 127 (bit 2) (inverted bit)
・ Power failure monitoring signal (bit 3)
・ Discharge abnormality status signal (bit 4)
・ Shoot ball break switch signal (bit 5)
・ Overflow switch signal (bit 6)
・ Touch switch signal (bit 7)
Through the processes from step S91 to step S95, information related to the switch monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 161) is read.

Next, similarly, a process of reading the information of the switch to be monitored at the input port 2 (second input port 162) is performed.
First, the address of the input port 2 (second input port 162) is prepared in step S96, and then the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared in step S97. Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S98, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S99.
Next, in step S100, switch read processing is performed for input port 2 (first input port 162).

Here, the switches monitored at the input port 2 (first input port 162) are as follows. Note that the switch monitored at the input port 2 has no bit to be inverted.
・ Left start port switch 105 (bit 0): “Start port 1 winning signal”
Here, the left start port switch 105 is also output as a “start port 1 winning signal” of the test signal by pattern branching, and this is the same for each switch described later, which is indicated on the right side of each bit mode. Yes.
Middle start switch 107 (bit 1): “Start port 2 winning signal”
Right start port switch 106 (bit 2): “Start port 3 winning signal”
Left winning mouth switch 102-1 (bit 3): “Normal winning mouth 1 winning signal”
Right winning port switch 102-2 (bit 4): “Normal winning port 2 winning signal”
Here, as described above, the winning opening switch 102 is for detecting the game balls won in the general winning openings 36a and 6b, and it is described that 1 to n are provided according to the number of the general winning openings. Yes. In the first embodiment, since two general winning ports 36a and 6b are provided as the general winning ports, the left winning port switch for convenience of description is shown as the winning port switch corresponding to each of the general winning ports 36a and 6b. The switch detection signal to the input port 2 (first input port 162) is processed as the 102-1 and the right winning prize switch 102-2.
・ Large prize opening switch 103 (bit 5): "Special electric accessory 1 winning signal 1"
・ Right large prize opening switch 104 (bit 6): “Special electric accessory 1 winning signal 2”
Unused (bit 7): Circuit connection is made to a relay board (not shown) as a gate switch spare, and GND connection (Low: 0) is fixed on the relay board so as to be always in an OFF state.
Through the processes from step S96 to step S100, information related to the switch monitored by the input port 2 (second input port 162) is read.

Next, similarly, a process of reading information on a switch to be monitored at the input port 3 (third input port 163) is performed.
First, the address of the input port 3 (third input port 163) is prepared in step S101, and then the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared in step S102. Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S103, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S104.
Next, in step S105, a switch reading process is performed for the input port 3 (third input port 163).

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 163) are as follows.
-Panel radio wave sensor 114 (bit 0) (inverted bit)
・ Switch abnormality detection signal 1 (bit 1)
・ Magnetic sensor 115 (bit 2)
・ Frame error signal (bit 3)
・ Payout busy signal (bit 4)
・ Switch abnormality detection signal 2 (bit 5)
・ Vibration sensor 116 (bit 6) (reversing bit)
・ Unused (bit 7)
Here, as shown in FIG. 10, the switch abnormality detection signal 1 is an abnormality detection signal 1 output when an abnormality of a sensor or a switch is detected in the output of the proximity I / F 121a. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the switch abnormality detection signal 2 is an abnormality detection signal 2 that is output when an abnormality of a sensor or a switch is detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121b.
Through the processing from step S101 to step S105, information related to the switch monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 163) is read.

Next, similarly, a process of reading information on a switch to be monitored at the input port 4 (fourth input port 164) is performed.
First, the address of the input port 6 (sixth input port 166) is prepared in step S106, and then the address of the switch control area 4 in the RWM is prepared in step S107. Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S108, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S109.
Next, in step S110, a switch reading process is performed for the input port 4 (fourth input port 164).

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 4 (fourth input port 164) are as follows. Note that the switch monitored at the input port 4 has no bit to be inverted.
Specific area switch 111 (bit 0):
Here, as described above, the specific area switch 111 detects that the game ball that has flowed into the heavenly acting apparatus 66 has passed through the special prize area 69, and has a function of detecting a V prize. In the example, the detection signal of the specific region switch 111 is also output as “conditional device operation region 1 passage signal 1” and “object continuous operation region 1 passage signal 1”.
The “conditional device operation region 1 passage signal 1” and the “subject continuous operation region 1 passage signal 1” are one of the test signals similar to the “starter 1 winning signal” and the like.
・ Right remaining ball outlet switch (bit 1):
This switch is the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113, and detects a game ball that has escaped to the outside from the heaven inflow space 62, and is also output as "special electric accessory 1 discharge port passing signal 1". .
・ Left residual ball outlet switch (bit 2):
This switch is a left remaining ball discharge port switch 112, and detects a game ball that has escaped from the hell inflow space 63 to the outside, and is also output as "special electric accessory 1 discharge port passing signal 2". .
・ Direction switch 108 (bit 3)
Unused (bit 4): Circuit connection is made to a relay board (not shown) as motor switch reserve 2, and GND connection (Low: 0) is fixed on the relay board so that it is always turned off. Unused (bit 5) ): Connected to a relay board (not shown) as a motor switch spare 1 and fixed to GND connection (Low: 0) on the relay board so as to be always off. Second motor switch (bit 6): Heaven role This is for detecting the rotational position of the accessory motor 72 arranged in the object device 66 (the position of the heavenly agent device 66).
First motor switch (bit 7): for detecting the rotational position of the accessory motor 81 arranged in the first accessory device 51 (the inclination of the bridge body 80 in the first accessory device 51 having a seesaw structure). is there.

After step S110, the process proceeds to step S111, where the exclusive OR of the previous finalized state and the current finalized state reversed is saved in the RWM as a falling edge, and the input process is terminated.
This is because the switch read processing is performed twice in one interrupt processing at a predetermined time difference, thereby increasing the processable amount in the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt cycle and simplifying the structure design. It is what balances. The details will be described in a later-described switch read processing routine.

[Switch read processing]
Next, a subroutine of the switch reading process (steps S95, S100, S105, S110) in the above-described input process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S121). This corresponds to the first reading. Next, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S122), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S123), and then the target switch control area in the RWM is set. Save (store) in port input state 1 (step S124). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms = 100 μs) until the second reading to elapse (step S125).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S126). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S127), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S128), and then the port input state of the target switch control area 2 is saved (stored) (step S129). Thereafter, the bit, that is, the signal changed by the first reading and the second reading is detected, and a definite bit pattern is created (step S130). Specifically, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit in the first and second states of the read input port state is “1” and the different bit is “0”. Next, the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is calculated and used as the definite bit this time (step S131).

  Next, an unconfirmed bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is 0, and a different bit is 1 (step S132), and the logical product of the unconfirmed bit pattern and the final state at the time of the previous interrupt Is taken as the previous hold bit (step S133). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined, saved in the RWM as the current finalized state (step S134), exclusive-ORed with the previous and current finalized state, and saved in the RWM as the rising edge ( Step S135), the switch reading process is terminated.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. Also, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for more than twice the timer interrupt cycle by simple calculation, the design of the electric circuit that extends the pulse and the speed of the game ball passing through the switch are slowed down. It is necessary to design the structure of the spherical channel.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the processable amount in the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt period by performing the switch read process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference. It is possible to achieve both the increase and the ease of structural design and avoid the above problems.

[Output processing]
Next, output processing (step S64) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output process, all output data of the port 137 (see FIG. 10) for outputting the segment data of the batch display device 50 is first turned off (step S141). Next, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device 50 is updated (updated (+1) in the range of 0 to 3) (step S142).
In this embodiment, the collective display device 50 is composed of LEDs and is dynamically lit. Here, “special symbol display device”, “special symbol hold”, “game state display (other than big hit, big hit) "Is displayed.

Subsequently, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (loaded) (step S143). Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S144). The external information to be combined here is information related to “door / frame opening” and “security signal”.
Next, the synthesized data is output to the digit / external information output port (sixth port 138) (step S145). The sixth port 138 is an output port for outputting ON / OFF data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 is connected.
Next, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 152 is loaded and synthesized (step S146).
As external information to be synthesized here. It is as follows.
-1 signal per jackpot-2 signals per jackpot-Number signal for winning a prize-Number of times signal for a winning feature-Start signal 1 signal-Start signal 2 signal-Main prize ball signal

Next, the synthesized data is output to the external information / firing permission signal output port (seventh port 139) (step S148). The seventh port 136 is an output port for outputting information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 152 as external information. Next, it is determined whether or not an error for stopping the game has occurred (step S149). If no error for stopping the game has occurred (step S149; YES), the process proceeds to step S150. On the other hand, if an error for stopping the game has occurred (step S149; NO), the process branches to step S153.
When the process proceeds to step S150, the segment line output data is loaded (acquired) from the segment data area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter in step S150, and the obtained segment output data is output to the segment output port. Output to (fifth port 137). The fifth port 137 is an output port for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50.
Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port is synthesized and output to the second port 134 (step S151). The second port 134 is a port for outputting data to be output to the solenoid, and the solenoid corresponding to the data to be output here is as follows.
・ First big prize opening solenoid 201
・ 2nd prize winning solenoid ・ Household solenoid 203
・ Solenoid solenoid 204

After step S151, the process proceeds to step S152.
On the other hand, if NO is determined in the previous step S149, as described above, the process branches to step S153, and the off data is output to the solenoid output port. As a result, off data is output to the second port 134 for outputting the solenoid output data, so that the first big prize opening solenoid 201, the second big prize winning solenoid, the accessory solenoid 203, The object solenoids 204 are all off and do not operate.
Then, after step S153, the process proceeds to step S152.
When the process proceeds from step S151 or step S153 to step S153, it is determined in this step S152 whether or not an error is awaiting. If it is not waiting for error release (step S152; NO), it is determined that the game can be advanced, and the data to be output to the motor output port (third output port 135) is synthesized and output in step S154.
The third output port 135 is a port for outputting motor output data. The motor corresponding to the data output here is as follows.
-The accessory motor 72: drives the heavenly rotating body 67 of the heavenly accessory device 66.-The accessory motor 81: drives the bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51. Thereby, the operation of the accessory motor 72 and the accessory motor 81 is performed. Will be allowed.
On the other hand, if waiting for error cancellation (step S152; YES), it is necessary to wait until the error is canceled. Therefore, it is determined that the game does not proceed, and the motor output port (third output port 135 is determined in step S155). ) To output off data. Thereby, the operation of the accessory motor 72 and the accessory motor 81 is not permitted.

After passing through step S154 or step S155, the process proceeds to step S156 to load and synthesize output data 1 to 3 of the test signal output to the test firing test apparatus, and a test terminal output port provided on the relay board 151 1 is output (step S156). Thereafter, the test signal output data 4 to 6 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 provided on the relay board 151 (step S157).
Next, the test signal output data 7 to 8 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 provided on the relay board 151 (step S158). Also, the test signal output data 9 to 10 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 provided on the relay board 151 (step S159). Further, the test signal output data 11 to be output to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is outputted to the test terminal output port 5 provided on the relay board 151 (step S160), and FIG. End the output process.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S65) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout command transmission process, first, the number of winnings to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the counter area 2 (step S171).
The structure of the winning number counter area 2 is, for example, as follows.
・ 3 prize ball counters ・ 10 prize ball counters ・ 14 prize ball counters Each prize number counter area can store up to 255 prizes, and when the prize number counter area 2 is checked, the above counter is incremented. Check in order (from 3 prize ball counters).
There is also a winning counter area 1, which will be described in detail later.

Returning to the flow, if there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (step S171: NO), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S172), and all the winning number counter areas are counted. It is determined whether the number check has been completed (step S173). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S173; YES), the process jumps to step S182.
On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S173; NO), the process returns to step S171 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step S171 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area 2 (step S171; YES), the process proceeds to step S174. Then, the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S174), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 is acquired (step S175). Next, the value in the remaining award ball area and the current payout number are added (step S176), and the addition result is saved in the remaining award ball area (step S177). As a result, the current payout amount is added to the value in the remaining award ball area until the previous time, and the current total value is saved in the award ball remaining area.
Each time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of output of the main prize ball signal is incremented by (+1) and updated (details will be described later).
Next, “10” is subtracted from the addition result of step S177 (step S178), and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S179). If the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S179; YES), the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is updated by adding (+1) (step S180), and then this subtraction is “0” or more. The result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S181). After step S181, step S178 is also returned to repeat the loop. Accordingly, a prize ball is generated by the game, and the number of payouts is added to the value of the remaining prize ball number area until the previous time, “10” is subtracted from the addition result, and the subtraction result is “0” or more The processing from step S178 to step S181 is repeated.
If the subtraction result is less than “0” (step S179; NO), the process branches to step S182.

Here, among the processes shown in FIG. 19, the processes in the left column (steps S <b> 171 to S <b> 181) are responsible for the process of updating the number of output of the main prize ball signal. On the other hand, among the processes shown in FIG. 19, the process in the right column (steps S182 to S191) to be described later is in charge of the process of transmitting the payout command.
Now, returning to the flow and proceeding to step S182, if the payout command transmission timer is not “0”, the payout command transmission timer is updated (−1) (ie, subtracted by (−1)). In this method, the payout command is not transmitted every timer interrupt, but the elapse of the predetermined time is counted in order to send it after a predetermined time. In addition, as a premise for transmitting the payout command, for example, the payout control device 200 (payout control board) side is also in a state in which a prize ball can be paid out.
Next, it is determined whether or not the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S183). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S183; NO), the current routine is terminated. Return. Therefore, this routine is repeated until the payout command transmission timer becomes “0”.

When the payout command transmission timer becomes “0” (step S183; YES), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S184). In the determination in step S184, the determination is made not by looking at the state of the output port but by looking at the payout busy signal flag. If the payout busy signal is busy (step S184; YES), the current routine is terminated and the process returns. Therefore, this routine is repeated until the payout busy signal is not busy.
Here, the condition that the payout busy signal is busy is as follows.
• During payout operation • During ball lending operation • During shot ball out of error • Overflow error • Incorrect frame radio wave • Discharged ball detection switch is abnormal: (Switch that monitors the ball that has been paid out)
・ Insufficient payout error ・ In an excessive payout error ・ When there is a count of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of game balls remaining) (when it is not 0)

If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S184; NO), a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls (for example, three prize balls, ten prize balls, and 14 prize balls) are provided. Among these, it is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (step S185).
The structure of the winning number counter area 1 is, for example, as follows.
・ 3 prize ball counters ・ 10 prize ball counters ・ 14 prize ball counters Each prize number counter area can store up to 65,535 prizes. Check in order (from 3 prize ball counters).

Returning to the flow, if there is no count number in the winning number counter area 1 (step S185: NO), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S186), and all the winning number counter areas are counted. It is determined whether the number check is completed (step S187). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S187; YES), the payout command transmission process ends and the process returns.
On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S187; NO), the process returns to step S185 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step S185 that there is a count number in the winning number counter area 1 (step S185; YES), the process proceeds to step S188. Then, the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S188), and a payout command corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S189). Next, the acquired payout command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S190). Thereby, a payout command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 at a predetermined timing. Next, an initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S191). The payout command transmission timer area is an area in which the value of the payout command transmission timer described in step S182 is written. After step S191, the payout command transmission process is terminated and the process returns.
With the above processing, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 performs processing for paying out the game ball based on this payout command.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S66) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the special symbol random number.
In the random number update process 1, it is first determined whether the special symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S201).
If the special symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S201; NO), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. On the other hand, when the special symbol random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S201; YES), the special symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S202), and the next initial value of the loaded special symbol random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S203), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S67) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The prize opening switch / state monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (signal change) from a switch provided at each of the various prize winning openings, and monitoring the state.
In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a left large winning opening switch monitoring table corresponding to the left large winning opening switch 103 (for example, a port number to which a detection signal from the left large winning opening switch 103 is input and the signal) (Data indicating the bit position and the like in this port is stored) (step S211). The left big winning port switch 103 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43a in the variable winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the first accessory device 51 having a seesaw structure.
Note that when the movable members 43 a and 43 b of the variable winning device 35 are released, the game ball flows into the first accessory device 51 through the winning space 41.
In the present embodiment, two left winning port switch 103 and right large winning port switch 104 are provided as switches for detecting a game ball flowing into the first accessory device 51, and flow into the first accessory device 51. Since the game ball is detected by either the left big prize port switch 103 or the right big prize port switch 104, the left big prize port switch monitoring table corresponding to one of the left big prize port switches 103 here. Next, while the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not opened, the variable winning device 35 is monitored for illegal winnings, and fraud & winning is detected to detect normal winnings. A monitoring process (step S212) is executed.

After that, the right big prize port switch monitoring table corresponding to the right big prize port switch 104 (for example, the port number to which the detection signal from the right big prize port switch 104 is inputted, the bit position in the port of the signal, etc.) Is prepared) (step S213). The right big prize opening switch 104 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43b in the variable prize winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the first accessory device 51 having a seesaw structure.
In the present embodiment, two left winning port switch 103 and right large winning port switch 104 are provided as switches for detecting a game ball flowing into the first accessory device 51, and flow into the first accessory device 51. Since the game ball is detected by either the left big prize port switch 103 or the right big prize port switch 104, the right big prize port switch monitoring table corresponding to the other right big prize port switch 104 is here. Next, while the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not opened, the variable winning device 35 is monitored for illegal winnings, and a normal winning is detected. A monitoring process (step S214) is executed.

Next, a winning monitoring table of winning opening switches that can always win is prepared (step S215). The following are the prize opening switches that can always be awarded.
・ Left starter switch 105
・ Middle start port switch 107
・ Right start port switch 106
-Left winning entrance switch 102-1: "Normal winning entrance 1 winning signal"
・ Right winning entrance switch 102-2: “Normal winning entrance 2 winning signal”
Here, as described above, the winning opening switch 102 is for detecting the game balls won in the general winning openings 36a and 6b, and it is described that 1 to n are provided according to the number of the general winning openings. Yes. In the first embodiment, since two general winning ports 36a and 6b are provided as the general winning ports, the left winning port switch for convenience of description is shown as the winning port switch corresponding to each of the general winning ports 36a and 6b. The switch detection signal to the input port 2 (the first input port 162) is processed as the 102-1 and the right prize opening switch 102-2.

Next, a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is performed (step S216). The detailed procedure of the winning number counter updating process will be described later.
Next, the state scan counter is updated (“+1” is updated in the range of 0 to 3) (step S217). The state scan counter is for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors as the gaming machine state is to be monitored this time.
Subsequently, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S218).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 as gaming machine states are as follows, and these are used for monitoring abnormalities in the shooting ball break switch, overflow switch, and dispensing control device 200 from the dispensing control device 200. Respond to errors.
(B) When 0: Switch error error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
(B) When 1: Shooting ball break error (c) When 2: Overflow error (d) 3: When payout error

Next, a gaming machine state check process is performed (step S219). This is to check for errors in the prepared gaming machine state monitoring table 1 (details will be described later).
Subsequently, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared (step S220).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 as gaming machine states are as follows, and these are fraudulent frame radio waves from the glass frame opening detection switch 117, the body frame opening detection switch 118, and the payout control device 200. Corresponds to signals, touch switch signals, etc.
(E) When 0: Glass frame 5 opened (front frame opened)
(F) When 1: Front frame 4 opened (game frame opened)
(G) When 2: Frame radio wave fraud (H) 3: When touch switch is turned on (touching the firing operation handle 11 turns on the touch switch provided on the firing operation handle 11)
Next, a gaming machine state check process is performed (step S221). This is to check for errors in the prepared gaming machine state monitoring table 2 (details will be described later).
Next, it is determined whether or not the state scan counter is “0”. Since the state scan counter is updated by “+1” in the range of 0 to 3, it is determined here whether or not it is “0”.
If the status scan counter is not “0” (step S222; NO), the winning prize switch / status monitoring process is terminated and the process returns. Therefore, the routine is repeated at this time.

On the other hand, if the state scan counter is “0” (step S222; YES), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S223).
The type of error monitored by the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 as the gaming machine state includes a switch abnormality 2 error. The switch abnormality 2 error is an error when an abnormality such as a connector disconnection in various sensors or switches connected to the proximity I / F 121b is detected.
Next, a gaming machine state check process is performed (step S224). This is to check errors prepared in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (details will be described later).
Next, a payout busy signal check process is performed (step S224). This is to check whether the payout busy signal is busy. Since the status scan counter is updated by “+1” in the range of 0 to 3, the payout busy signal check process is executed once every four times. Accordingly, the payout busy signal is monitored (checked) at a cycle of 16 ms.
After step S224, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & winning monitoring process (steps S212 and S214) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the winning monitoring process, each of the two left big prize opening switches 103 and the right big prize opening switch 104 for detecting a game ball to be won in the variable prize winning device 35 is a left start opening switch 105 as a prize opening switch that can always win. Processing performed for the middle start port switch 107, right start port switch 106, left winning port switch 102-1 (ordinary winning port 1 winning signal), right winning port switch 102-2 (normal winning port 2 winning signal). is there. Regarding the variable winning device 35, since it is easy to perform fraud in which the movable members 43a and 43b are forcibly opened and the game balls are inserted and the prize balls are paid out, fraud monitoring is performed in addition to detection of winning.
Here, the information defined in the fraud monitoring table prepared for explaining the fraud & winning prize monitoring process in the winning mouth switch / status monitoring process is as follows.
・ Data for judging whether there is an input (monitor switch bit)
・ Lower address of fraud monitoring information ・ Lower address of illegal prize amount area ・ Illegal prize error notification command ・ Unauthorized prize number upper limit value
-Winning mouth switch table address-Notification timer update information (permission / update)

  In the fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch to be monitored for error is checked (step S231), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S232). The fraud monitoring period is a special gaming state in which the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are opened when there are two left big prize opening switches 103 and right big prize opening switches 104 as error monitoring target prize opening switches. It is a period other than.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S232; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize-winning switch (step S233). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S233; NO), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S242). When there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S233; YES), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S234), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example, 5) is determined (step S235). Note that the number of fraud occurrence determinations is not limited to five, for example, and can be set to a different value for each target winning opening switch. In this embodiment, the same is true for all winning opening switches. Value.

The determination number is five because, for example, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 in the open state (generally also referred to as a big prize opening) are converted to the closed state, the game ball wins a big prize. The game ball is sandwiched between the door members (in this case, the movable members 43a and 43b) of the mouth (that is, the variable winning device 35), and the game balls of the count switches (each of the two left big winning port switches 103 and the right big winning port switch 104). This is because when a prize is passed past the effective period or when noise occurs in the signal, it is not judged as illegal, and it is not illegal, but it is not easily judged as an error. For a place where the fraud monitoring condition is desired to be severe, the number of determinations may be one, for example.
If it is determined that the number of determinations has not been exceeded (step S235; NO), the process jumps to step S240 to prepare a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch. If the determined number is exceeded (step S235; YES), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the fraud determination number (step S236), and the initial value is saved in the target fraud winning notification timer area (step S237). For example, 60000 ms is set as the initial value of the unauthorized winning notification timer.
Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S238), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S239), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S240). ).

On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S232; NO), a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S240), and a winning number counter updating process (step S241) for setting a winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S242), and it is determined whether the notification timer is permitted to be updated (step S243). If the notification timer is not allowed to be updated (step S243; NO), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is permitted to be updated (step S243; YES), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S244). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.
The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is one of the two left large winning port switches 103 and the right large winning port switch 104, and is subject to error monitoring. Is not permitted if the other prize opening switch is the other right large prize opening switch 104. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the variable winning device 35, and to be up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).
That is, since the error monitoring is performed with the two left big prize opening switches 103 and the right big prize opening switch 104 for the big prize opening (the variable prize winning device 35), if the timer is updated with both switches, the timer is doubled. As a result, the illegal timer times out in half of the specified time, so that the timer is updated only at the timing of one left big prize opening switch 103 that performs the monitoring process later. It is what.
Note that when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is one winning port switch, update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S245). If the value is not 0 (step S245; NO), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S245; YES), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S246), and an illegal win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S45). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S248).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S248; YES), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the number of illegal winnings of interest is cleared ( In step S249, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S250). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S248; NO), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S250).

If the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S50; YES), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (step S250; NO), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S251), and command setting processing is performed ( Step S252), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.
Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (step S216) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S241) in the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input number counter update process, first, the number of winning-a-port switches to be monitored is acquired from the award-port monitoring table acquired in the above-described winning-port switch / state monitoring process (step S261).
Here, the information defined in the winning table in the winning port monitoring table prepared in the winning port switch / status monitoring process is as follows.
・ Data for determining the number of repetitions and input (monitoring switch bit) (defined for each switch)
・ Lower address of winning number counter area 1 (defined for each switch)
・ Lower address of winning number counter area 2 (defined for each switch)
Next, it is checked whether or not there is a detection signal input (more precisely, a change in input) from the prize-winning switch to be monitored (step S262). If it is determined that there is no input (S262; NO), the process jumps to step S271. If it is determined that there is an input (S262; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded in the next step S263. .

In the next step S264, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and it is checked in the subsequent step S265 whether it overflows. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S265; NO), the process proceeds to step S266 to save the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 and then proceeds to step S267.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S265 that a counter overflow has occurred (S265; YES), step S266 is skipped and the process jumps to step S267.
The maximum storage number (for example, 255 for the 1-byte size and 65535 for the 2-byte size) is determined depending on the size of the winning number counter area provided. , You will lose a lot of information on the number of prize balls you have to pay. In order to avoid this, in step S264, the contents of the area are not suddenly updated, and the update is performed after confirming that (+1) is set to “0” outside the area.
In this way, the process for the first half (definition will be described later) is performed, and the counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated.

Here, the processing from step S263 to step S266 (hereinafter referred to as the first half) is to update a counter for prize balls (payout command transmission). The counter size of the first half is 2 bytes, and the range from 0 to 65535 is the maximum memory number.
On the other hand, the processing from step S267 to step S270 described later (hereinafter referred to as the latter half) updates the counter for the main winning ball signal. The counter size in the latter half is 1 byte, and the range from 0 to 255 is the maximum storage number.

Returning to the flow, after passing through step S277, processing from step S267 to step S270 (that is, processing in the latter half) is performed. First, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S267).
Next, the process proceeds to the next step S268, where the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and it is checked whether it overflows in the subsequent step S269. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S269; NO), the process proceeds to step S270, the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2, and then the process proceeds to step S271.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S269 that a counter overflow has occurred (S269; YES), step S270 is skipped and the process jumps to step S271.
In this way, the latter half of the processing is performed, and the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated.

  As described above, if it is determined in step S262 that there is no input of a detection signal (exactly, a change in input) from the monitored prize opening switch (S262; NO), or a counter overflow has occurred in step S269 ( If it is determined (S269; YES), the process proceeds to step S272. In step S272, it is determined whether the monitoring process for all the switches is completed. The counter update process is terminated. On the other hand, if not completed (step S272; NO), the process returns to step S262 and repeats the above process. With the above processing, a winning ball corresponding to the winning is set in the winning number counter area 1 and data for generating a main winning ball signal is set in the winning number counter area 2.

[Game machine status check processing]
Next, the gaming machine state check process (steps S219, S221, S224) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gaming machine status check process, first, a plurality of switches whose gaming machine status should be monitored and a status scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal of the signals to be monitored this time The state monitoring table to be acquired is acquired (step S281).
Here, the information defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process includes the following.
(A) Lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area (b) Lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is saved (c) Mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal ) Signal ON judgment data (e) State OFF command (In the case of error system, meaning of error notification end command)
(F) Status ON command (in the case of an error system, the meaning of the error notification start command)
(G) Status off monitoring timer comparison value (h) Status on monitoring timer comparison value

Next, the state of the target signal acquired this time is checked, and it is determined whether the monitoring target signal is on, that is, whether the gaming machine state has changed (step S282).
If the signal is not on (step S282: NO), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S283).
Here, the state off flag prepared in step S283 will be described. Regarding the error system as the state indicated by the state off flag, it is a state that is not an error (normal). On the other hand, the touch switch as the state indicated by the state off flag is a state where the touch switch is not touched.
Next, the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S284). Thereafter, a target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S285), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S289).
On the other hand, if the target signal is on (step S282: YES), there is a possibility of an error occurrence, so a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S286). For example, as one of the errors defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table, if the shot ball is out, a shot ball supply switch (not shown) indicates that there is no game ball in the chute that supplies the game ball to the storage tank. If it is detected and turned on, step S282 becomes YES. If YES, the state on flag is prepared in step S286.
Next, the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S287). Thereafter, a target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S288), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S289).

If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S289; YES), that is, if the signal state has not changed, a timer is determined to determine whether error handling is necessary. The target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S292), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (a reference value for determining that an error handling is required) (step S293). ).
On the other hand, if the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state do not match (step S289; NO), that is, if the signal state has changed, it is determined that no further error handling is necessary, and the target signal The current signal state is saved in the control area (step S290), the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S291), the target state monitoring timer is updated by one (step S292), and the target state monitoring timer is updated. It is determined whether the value of has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S293).

When the value of the target state monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S293; NO), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S293: YES), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S294). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S295).
Here, when it is determined in step S293 that the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the error occurrence or release state has been confirmed. However, there are situations where it is determined that the error occurrence condition will be satisfied again when an error has already occurred, or that the error release condition will be confirmed again when no error is occurring. Therefore, after the process of step S294, in step S295, the prepared status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area to check whether the currently determined error status is the same as the current error flag status. I am doing so.

If the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S295; YES), the error status has not changed, so it is determined that no action is required, and the game The machine status check process ends. If the set status flag and the value of the target status flag area do not match (if the status flag is not the same) (step S29; NO), it means that it has changed to a new error status. The status flag is saved in the target status flag area (step S296), and the process proceeds to step S297. That is, the value of the target state flag area is changed to that of the state state that has been confirmed this time, and the process proceeds to step S297. In step S297, an effect command setting process is performed, and an effect command corresponding to the gaming machine state determined this time is set.
In this step S297, either the state off command prepared in step S284 or the state on command prepared in step S287 is transmitted. As a result, a treatment corresponding to the current gaming machine state is performed. For example, if the shot ball is out of play, the gaming machine state display notifying the user is notified or the notification is released. After step S297, the gaming machine state check process is terminated.
In this way, if a change occurs in the gaming machine state, the corresponding state flag is set to prepare a treatment effect command, and if the change in the gaming machine state is resolved, the corresponding state flag is cleared and the cancellation effect command is issued. Is set. In particular, in this gaming machine state check process, not only the change in the gaming machine state is monitored, but also the release is monitored and the process is shared.

Note that such gaming machine state check processing is the same for a change in gaming machine state such as opening of a glass frame or opening of a front frame.
In addition, if the above-mentioned commands for notifying various gaming machine states (especially on (occurrence)) are made different for each gaming machine state to be monitored, it is effective for players and hall staff. However, it is not necessary to specify the type of state, and the common commands may be used for those that have no problem even if the notification mode is common.
For example, if a dedicated notification start command is prepared when a shot ball is out, it is possible to notify “No ball in tank!” By voice or a message on the screen. Similarly, if the glass frame is open, it can be notified that “the glass frame is open!”.
If a common notification mode of notifying the player that “abnormality has occurred!” And lighting the frame decoration device 12 in red when the shot ball is broken and the glass frame is opened is used as a common command. It is only necessary to prepare an “abnormality notification start command”, which can reduce the processing load on the effect control device 300, and a message depending on the presence or absence of the liquid crystal information display device 451 as in the first embodiment of the present invention and its modification. Even if gaming machines with different display capabilities can be used in common, or if it is necessary to monitor new types of errors or gaming machine status, the control program of the production control device and the data in the audio ROM 327 can be used. There is an advantage that there is no need to change.
Note that the gaming machine state and error types to which the common “abnormality notification start command” and “abnormality notification end command” are applied are not limited to those described above. Any command that can be used as a common notification mode between different gaming machines may be used.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S225) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S301). As described above, since the status scan counter is updated by “+1” in the range of 0 to 3, the payout busy signal check process is executed once every four times. For example, the payout busy signal is monitored at a cycle of 16 ms ( Checked).
If the payout busy signal is not on (step S301; NO), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S302), and then an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S303). For example, 32 ms is set as the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value. After step S303, the process proceeds to step S304.
On the other hand, if the payout busy signal is ON in step S301 (step S301; YES), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S305), and then an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S306). . For example, 32 ms is set as the on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value. After step S306, the process proceeds to step S304.

When the process proceeds from step S303 or step S306 to step S304, in step S304, the value of the busy signal state region is compared with the state of the current signal to determine whether they are the same. This is to check whether the same gaming machine state continues for a plurality of interrupts.
The value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current signal. If they are not the same (step S304; NO), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step S307). In this case, if the value of the busy signal state area and the state of the current signal are not the same, the state of the busy signal has changed. For example, the state changes from the idle state to the busy state, or from the busy state to the idle state. There are changes.
Next, “0” of the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared. This is to prepare for the next busy signal change. Next, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by “+1” (step S309).
On the other hand, the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the current signal state in step S304, and if they are the same (step S304; YES), the process jumps to step S309 to update the busy signal monitoring timer by “+1” ( Step S309).

After step S309, it is subsequently determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has reached a monitoring timer comparison value (a reference value for determining that an error is necessary) (step S310).
Here, when it is determined in step S309 that the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the state of the busy signal is confirmed. However, there may be situations where the busy signal state is fixed when the busy signal state has already changed, or the busy signal state is fixed when the busy signal has not changed. In step S311, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the comparison value -1. In step S312, the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area.
If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S3103; NO), the payout busy signal check process is terminated.
Further, when the value of the busy signal monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S310: YES), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S311). The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S312). After step S312, the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

[Remaining sphere monitoring process]
Next, details of the remaining sphere monitoring process (step S68) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The remaining ball monitoring process is to monitor whether or not the game ball won in the variable winning device 35 passes outside from the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63 and remains in the variable winning device 35. is there.
In the remaining sphere monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left remaining sphere outlet switch 112 (step S321). The left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 detects a game ball that has flowed into the hell inflow space 63 in the variable winning device 35 and has a function of detecting whether or not a ball that has flowed into the hell inflow space 63 remains. doing. Therefore, the presence of input to the left remaining ball discharge switch 112 is detected when the game ball is discharged from the hell inflow space 63 and the left remaining ball discharge switch 112 detects the discharge and the signal is turned on. This is a state where the signal input is in the game control device 100.
That is, it is a state in which it is detected that the game ball is discharged from the hell inflow space 63 by the left remaining ball discharge port switch 112.

If it is determined that there is an input to the left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 (step S321; YES), if the remaining ball counter is not “0”, the remaining ball counter is updated by “−1” (step S322). The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 when they remain inside the variable winning device 35.
By repeating this routine, the remaining sphere counter is updated by “−1” until the remaining sphere counter becomes “0”. If the remaining ball counter becomes “0”, including the input monitoring of detection signals from the left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 and the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 which will be described later, the remaining ball in the variable winning device 35. There will be no state.
Here, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are released due to the establishment of the starting condition, and the game ball flows into the variable winning device 35, the game ball that has flowed in is left left large winning port switch 103 or right large winning port. Since it is always detected by any one of the switches 104, after the detection control signal input from the left big prize opening switch 103 or the right big prize opening switch 104 is input to the game control device 100, the left remaining ball outlet switch 112 Alternatively, if it is not detected by the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 that the game ball is discharged from the variable winning device 35, it can be determined that the remaining ball remains in the variable winning device 35. The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls (remaining balls) remaining in the variable winning device 35 based on the above theory. Therefore, if the remaining ball counter = 0, the remaining ball is not staying in the variable winning device 35.

After step S322, the process proceeds to step S323. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the left remaining sphere outlet switch 112 (step S321; NO), the remaining sphere counter is not updated by "-1", and the process jumps to step S323.
When the process proceeds to step S323, it is determined whether there is an input to the right remaining sphere outlet switch 113 (step S323). The right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 is disposed below the heavenly function device 66 (see FIG. 7) of the heaven inflow space 62 in the variable winning device 35, and detects that the ball has come out from the variable winning device 35. And has a function of detecting whether or not a sphere that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 remains. Therefore, the presence of input to the right remaining ball outlet switch 113 is detected when the game ball is discharged from the heaven inflow space 62 and the right remaining ball outlet switch 113 detects the discharge and the signal is turned on. This is a state where the signal input is in the game control device 100.
That is, it is a state in which it is detected that the game ball is discharged from the heaven inflow space 62 by the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113.

If it is determined that there is an input to the right remaining sphere outlet switch 113 (step S323; YES), if the remaining sphere counter is not “0”, the remaining sphere counter is updated by “−1” (step S324). As described above, the remaining sphere counter is updated to “−1”, and the remaining sphere counter is set to “0” by monitoring input of the detection signals from the left remaining sphere outlet switch 112 and the right remaining sphere outlet switch 113. If it becomes, it will be in the state in which there is no remaining ball | bowl inside the variable prize-winning apparatus 35. FIG.
After step S324, the process proceeds to step S325. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the right remaining sphere outlet switch 113 (step S323; NO), the remaining sphere counter is not updated by "-1", and the process jumps to step S325.
Next, in step S325, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left big prize opening switch 103. The left big winning port switch 103 detects a game ball flowing into the variable winning device 35. Therefore, the left large winning opening switch 103 has a function of detecting that a game ball flows into the variable winning device 35. If it is determined that there is an input to the left big prize opening switch 103 (step S325; YES), the remaining ball counter is updated by “+1” (step S326). This is because the left big prize opening switch 103 detects that the game ball has flowed into the variable winning device 35, so that the game ball staying inside the variable winning device 35 is counted as a remaining ball to be counted by the remaining ball counter. The remaining ball counter is incremented by “+1”.

After step S326, the process proceeds to step S327. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the left big prize opening switch 103 (step S325; NO), the remaining ball counter is not updated by “+1”, and the process jumps to step S327.
Next, in step S327, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the right big prize opening switch 104. Similarly, the right big winning opening switch 104 detects a game ball flowing into the variable winning device 35. Accordingly, the right big prize opening switch 104 has a function of detecting that a game ball flows into the variable prize winning device 35. If it is determined that there is an input to the right big prize opening switch 104 (step S327; YES), the remaining ball counter is updated by “+1” (step S328). This is because the right big prize opening switch 104 detects that the game ball has flowed into the variable winning device 35, so that the game ball staying in the variable winning device 35 is counted as a remaining ball to be counted by the remaining ball counter. The remaining ball counter is incremented by “+1”.

After step S328, the process proceeds to step S329. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the right big prize opening switch 104 (step S327; NO), the remaining ball counter is not updated by “+1”, and the process jumps to step S329.
Next, in step S329, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere counter is “0”. This is because by repeating this routine, the remaining sphere counter is updated by “−1” until the remaining sphere counter becomes “0” as will be described later. It is determined whether or not there is no remaining ball in the variable winning device 35.
If the remaining sphere counter is not “0” (step S329; NO), it is determined whether or not a remaining sphere error is occurring (step S330). The remaining ball error is a state in which an error that the remaining ball remains inside the variable winning device 35 is generated.
The processing of step S330 is performed when the remaining sphere counter is not “0” in step S329 for the first time, a remaining sphere error may have occurred. It is determined whether or not a residual sphere error has already occurred.
If a residual sphere error is occurring (step S330; YES), it is determined that a residual sphere error has already occurred by the previous routine, the routine is terminated, and the process returns. At this time, this routine is repeated until the determination in step S329 is YES, and when the determination in step S329 is YES, the process branches to step S337.

  On the other hand, if the remaining sphere error is not occurring (step S330; NO), the routine first becomes a routine in which the remaining sphere counter is not “0”, and there is a possibility that the remaining sphere error has occurred, so the process proceeds to step S331. The remaining sphere monitoring timer is updated by “−1” (step S331). This is because a game ball that plays a game inside the variable prize apparatus 35 is normally discharged from the variable prize apparatus 35 within a predetermined period. For example, some member and the inside of the variable prize apparatus 35 Since one or a plurality of game balls may be pinched in contact with the wall surface, the remaining ball monitoring timer measures the elapse of a predetermined period. For example, when the remaining sphere counter is not “0”, this routine is repeated, and even if the elapsed time of the predetermined period is measured by the remaining sphere monitoring timer, the remaining sphere counter is still not “0”. If there is, it is determined that there is a remaining ball.

Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere monitoring timer has become “0” (step S332). If the remaining sphere monitoring timer has not become “0” (step S332; NO), the routine returns and this routine is repeated. . If the remaining sphere monitoring timer becomes “0” (step S332; YES), it is determined that a remaining sphere error has occurred, a remaining sphere error in-progress flag is prepared (step S333), and the remaining sphere is detected. An error occurrence command is prepared (step S334). After step S334, the process proceeds to step S335.
On the other hand, if the remaining sphere counter is “0” (step S329; YES), it is determined that there is no remaining sphere, and the process jumps to step S336 to prepare a remaining sphere error canceling flag (step S336) and the remaining sphere. An error cancel command is prepared (step S337). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S335.

Next, in step S335, it is determined whether or not the prepared state flag is the same as the value of the remaining sphere error flag area. If the prepared state flag is the same as the value of the remaining sphere error flag area (step S335; YES), it is determined that there has been no change from the previous state flag, the routine is terminated, and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the prepared state flag is not the same as the value of the remaining sphere error flag region (step S335; NO), it is determined that the current state flag has changed from the previous time, and the state flag prepared this time is used as the remaining sphere error flag region. Is saved (step S338), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S339). By the effect command setting process, the remaining sphere error occurrence command set in step S334 and the remaining sphere error cancel command set in step S337 are sent to the effect control device 200. After step S339, the routine is terminated and the process returns.

  As described above, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are released due to the establishment of the start condition, and the game ball flows into the variable winning device 35, the game ball that has flowed in is either the left big prize opening switch 103 or the right big prize. The game control device 100 receives an input of a detection signal from the left big winning port switch 103 or the right big winning port switch 104 and then the left remaining ball outlet switch 112. Alternatively, if it is not detected by the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 that the game ball is discharged from the variable winning device 35, it is determined that the remaining ball remains inside the variable winning device 35, and a remaining ball error generation command is issued. When it is sent to the production control device 200, as shown in the timer interruption process (FIG. 15), the special game is not performed during the error operation. . Further, when there is no remaining ball and a remaining ball error cancel command is sent to the effect control device 200, the game (special game) is resumed.

[Game stop error handling]
Next, details of the game stop error process (step S69) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the game stop error process, first, it is determined whether or not the error is waiting to be released (step S351). If it is not waiting for an error release (step S351; NO), it is determined whether an error operation is in progress (step S352). If there is no error operation (step S352; NO), it is determined that there is no error operation, the routine is terminated, and the process returns. Therefore, if the error is not awaiting and the error is not in operation, no error occurs and the game is continued.
On the other hand, if an error operation is being performed (step S352; YES), the game stop error control timer is updated by "-1" (step S353). Next, it is determined whether or not the game stop error control timer has reached “0” (step S354). The game stop error control timer is for counting a certain period of time in order to stop the game for a certain period when an error occurs in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1).

Next, if the game stop error control timer is not “0” (step S354; NO), the process returns and the routine is repeated. When the game stop error control timer becomes “0” (step S354; YES), an error release waiting flag is saved in the game stop error state area (step S355). Next, a game stop error cancel command is prepared (step S356), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S357). By the effect command setting process, the game stop error cancel command prepared in step S356 described above is sent to the effect control device 200. After step S357, the routine ends and returns.
On the other hand, if waiting for error cancellation (step S351; YES), the process branches to step S358. Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 127 (step S358). This is to determine whether the RAM initialization switch 127 has been operated in order to cancel the error.
If there is no input to the RAM initialization switch 127 (step S358; NO), the routine is terminated and the process returns. If there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 127 (step S358; YES), a game stop error release command is prepared (step S359) and an effect command setting process is performed (step S360). By the effect command setting process, the game stop error cancel command prepared in step S359 described above is sent to the effect control device 200.

Next, the releasing flag is saved in the abnormal discharge flag area (step S361), and the abnormal discharge counter area is cleared to “0” (step S362). The abnormal discharge is an abnormality in which a larger number of game balls than the number of game balls flowing into the variable prize apparatus 35 are discharged from the variable prize apparatus 35. In other words, it is an abnormal discharge that does not flow in by a regular route, but is illegal to put a game ball directly by hand from the front of the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63 (with the glass frame 4 opened). In order to perform the monitoring, an abnormal discharge counter area, an in-release flag relating to abnormal discharge, and the like are provided. Therefore, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, a release flag relating to abnormal discharge is saved and “0” is cleared in the abnormal discharge counter area, so that the next game stop error is prepared.
Next, the releasing flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S363), and the magnet fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to “0” (step S364). For example, the magnet fraud is detected by the magnetic sensor 115. As a result, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, the release flag relating to the magnet fraud is saved and the magnet fraud monitoring timer area is cleared to “0”, which causes a game stop error due to the next magnet fraud. Provided.
Next, the releasing flag is saved in the vibration fraud flag area (step S365), and the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer area is cleared to “0” (step S366). The vibration fraud is detected by the vibration sensor 116, for example. As a result, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, the cancellation flag relating to vibration fraud is saved, and “0” is cleared in the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer area. Prepared for.

Next, the releasing flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area (step S367), and the normal flag is saved in the game stop error flag area (step S368). Radio fraud is detected by the panel radio wave sensor 114, for example. As a result, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, a release flag related to radio wave fraud and a normal flag are saved, so that a game stop error associated with the next radio fraud is prepared. After step S368, the routine ends and returns.
In this way, in the game stop error processing, if there is an error that stops the game (such as malicious ones such as radio fraud, magnet fraud, vibration fraud, abnormal discharge, etc.), the game is stopped while the error is released Therefore, it is monitored whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 127, and an error release flag is saved to prepare for the next error.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step S72) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special game process, the left start port switch 105, the right start port switch 106, the middle start port switch 107, the left big prize port switch 103, the right big prize port switch 104, the specific area switch 111, and the input switch 108 are monitored. Then, control of the entire process related to the special figure variation game, etc., and setting of display of the special figure are performed.

As shown in FIG. 28, in the special game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process is performed (step S371). In the start port switch monitoring process, winnings to the left start port switch 105, the right start port switch 106, and the middle start port switch 107 are monitored. The game result prior determination is performed in advance to determine the game result based on the winning in advance before the start of the special figure variation game based on the winning.
Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step S372) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the left large winning opening switch 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104 provided in the variable winning device 35 is performed.
Next, a specific area switch monitoring process (step S373) is performed. In this specific area switch monitoring process, the winning of a game ball to the specific area switch 111 provided in the heavenly accessory device 66 of the variable prize apparatus 35 is monitored, and a process for setting an effect command is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the effect switch 108 (step S374). The effect switch 108 is disposed in a space immediately before the game ball enters the heavenly-working device 66 in the variable prize winning device 35. An inflow effect of the heavenly instrument device 66 is made to make the player expect that a ball fits into the winning recesses 68a and 68b. Therefore, in step S374, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the effect switch 108 and the detection signal has been input to the game control device 100.
If there is an input to the effect switch 108 (step S374; YES), an effect switch passing command is prepared (step S375), and then an effect command setting process is performed (step S376). Thus, if the game ball passes through the effect switch 108, an effect command is sent to the effect control device 200, and the information display 45 displays various game states. The board decoration device 351 and the frame decoration device 12 are also controlled by sending a production command to the production control device 200.

After step S376, the process proceeds to step S377. On the other hand, if there is no input to the effect switch 108 (step S374; NO), the process jumps to step S377.
In step S377, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is “0” (step S378). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step S378; YES), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step S379), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step S380). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step S381).

If the special figure game process number is “0” in step S381, a power-on operation process is performed (step S382). In the power-on operation processing, the game can be started by performing processing such as returning the accessory motor 81 in the first accessory device 51 and the accessory motor 72 in the heavenly accessory device 66 to the initial position when the power is turned on. To be in a proper state.
In step S381, when the special figure game process number is “1”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure fluctuation processing are performed. A special figure routine process (step S383) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
When the special figure game process number is “2” in step S381, special figure changing process for setting the special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step S384) is performed.

When the special figure game process number is “3” in step S381, special figure display processing (for example, setting information necessary for performing the small hit release operation corresponding to the game result of the special figure variable game) ( Step S385) is performed.
When the special figure game process number is “4” in step S381, a small hit opening process (step S386) for executing a setting process related to the big winning opening in the small hit is performed.
In step S381, if the special figure game process number is “5”, the remaining balls that have won the prize in the big prize opening (referring to the variable prize winning device 35; hereinafter the same) during the small hitting process are discharged. The small hit remaining sphere process (step S387) is performed for setting the time for this, and setting the information necessary for performing the small hit end process.
If the special figure game process number is “6” in step S381, a small hit end process (step S388) for setting information necessary for completing the small hit and performing fanfare / interval processing is performed. .
In step S381, if the special figure game process number is “7”, it is necessary to perform processing related to the fanfare / interval such as setting of the winning prize opening time value corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the number of rounds. Fanfare / interval processing (step S389) for setting various information is performed.

If the special figure game process number is “8” in step S381, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command setting process or a big hit end process is performed. For this purpose, a special winning opening open process (step S390) for performing a process of setting information necessary for this is performed.
In step S381, when the special figure game process number is “9”, a process for forcibly ending the period for waiting for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged (the big winning opening remaining ball processing period) Then, the winning prize remaining ball processing (step S391) is performed for performing processing for setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing.
In step S381, if the special figure game process number is “10”, a big hit end process (step S392) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

Then, after preparing the table (special figure 1 fluctuation control table) for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 in the collective display apparatus 50 (step S393), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process which concerns on the special figure 1 of the collective display apparatus 50 ( Step S394) is performed. Next, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the collective display device 50 (the special figure 2 fluctuation control table) (step S395), the symbol fluctuation control process according to the special figure 2 of the collective display device 50 ( Step S396) is performed. Next, a stopper solenoid control process is performed (step S397), and the special figure game process is terminated. The stopper solenoid control process controls the accessory solenoid 204 for driving the bat member 53 in the first accessory device 51 up and down, and provides information advantageous to the player through lamp notification or the like (the game ball is the first player. For example, the bat member 53 is driven upward to roll in the bridge main body 80 of the object device 51 and flow into the hell inflow space 63, thereby performing a process for producing the information).
On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step S378 (step S378; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step S393, and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

Here, the small win is the opening of the large winning opening when the winning winning opening (all starting winning openings of the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b and the second starting winning opening 34) is won (the variable winning device 35). From the opening of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize-winning device 35) until the game ball passes the special prize area 69 and wins a V, and a big win lottery is performed. However, if the V prize is not won, the prize is awarded to the big prize opening (variable prize winning device 35).
Accordingly, all the (lottery) results of the special figure variation display game are small hits. Per 3R and 7R are not small hits, but indicate the type of big hit.
Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big win occurs in a special figure variation game (V winning, that is, a game ball passes through the specific winning area 69). This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 35 as the special electric accessory is set (the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step S371) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 29, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a left start port (first start winning port 33a) winning monitor table is prepared (step S401), and a hard random number acquisition process (step S402) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning at the first start winning opening 33a (step S403).
If it is determined in step S403 that there is no winning in the first start winning opening 33a (step S403; NO), the process proceeds to step S405, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S403 that there is a prize at the first start winning opening 33a (step S403; YES), special figure 1 starting opening switch processing is performed (step S404). The special figure 1 start opening switch process is a process related to the start winning such as extraction of a special symbol random number accompanying the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 33a. After step S404, the process proceeds to step S405.
Note that the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is not provided with so-called ordinary electric power or ordinary figure, so that there is no general electric power support for the start winning prize.

In step S405, the same process as the process for monitoring the winning at the first start winning opening 33a described above is sequentially executed for the first starting winning opening 33b (right start opening).
That is, a winning start table for the right starting port (first starting winning port 33b) is prepared (step S405), and a hard random number acquisition process (step S406) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the first starting winning port 33b. Is determined (step S407).
If it is determined in step S407 that there is no winning at the first start winning opening 33b (step S407; NO), the process proceeds to step S409, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S407 that there is a prize at the first start winning opening 33b (step S407; YES), special figure 1 starting opening switch processing is performed (step S408). The special figure 1 start port switch process is the same process as step S404 described above. After step S408, the process proceeds to step S409.

In step S409, the same process as the process for monitoring the winning at the first start winning opening 33a described above is sequentially executed for the second starting winning opening 34 (medium start opening).
That is, a winning start monitoring table for the middle start opening (second start winning opening 34) is prepared (step S409), and a hard random number acquisition process (step S410) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the second start winning opening 34. Is determined (step S411).
If it is determined in step S411 that there is no winning in the second start winning opening 34 (step S411; NO), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S411 that there is a prize at the second start winning opening 34 (step S411; YES), special figure 2 starting opening switch processing is performed (step S412). The special figure 2 start opening switch processing is a process related to the start winning such as extraction of a special symbol random number in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 34. After step S412, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps S402, S406, S410) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 30, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, of the first start winning ports (left starting port, right starting port) 33a, 33b and the second starting winning ports (medium start port) 34, Information on no winning at the start port is set (step S421), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the first start winning ports 33a and 33b and the second start winning port 34 ( Step S422). Then, if there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step A422; NO), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step S422; YES), the random number latch register status is read (step S423), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S424). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step S424; NO), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S424; YES), the fluctuation pattern random number extracted to the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step S425). The variation pattern random number is a random number that determines how the special display variation is displayed on the collective display device 50. Next, among the first start winning ports 33a and 33b and the second start winning port 34, the winning information of the monitoring target start port is set (step S426), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Start Switch Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 start port switch process (steps S404 and S408) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure 1 start opening switch process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input to the first start winning award (left start opening, right start opening) 33a, 33b.

As shown in FIG. 31, in the special figure 1 start port switch passing process, first, of the first start winning ports (left start port, right start port) 33a, 33b, the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch Is loaded with the number of times of starting port 1 signal output, which is the number of times information related to the output to the management device outside the pachinko machine 1 (step S431), and the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S432). Is determined to overflow (step S433).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step S433; NO), the updated value is saved in the start port 1 signal output number area of the RWM (step S434), and the process proceeds to step S435. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step S433; YES), the process proceeds to step S435.
In this embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port 1 signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by updating “+1”, and it is determined that the output count overflows. Therefore, if the looped and loaded value becomes “0”, it is determined that the number of outputs overflows, so that the saving is not performed.

If it progresses to step S435, it will be determined whether it is processing normally, and if it is not processing normally (step S435; NO), a special figure 1 start port switch process will be complete | finished. During normal processing, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting and production setting of the special figure fluctuation game, the setting of information necessary to perform the special figure fluctuation processing, the customer waiting production, etc. It is carried out.
On the other hand, if the process is normally in progress (step S435; YES), it is determined whether or not there is a hold in FIG. 2 (step S436).
Here, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening), only one special figure is held (holding of special figure 2). On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 33a, 33b (first start opening), the special figure is not held (the special figure 1 is not held). Only in the special figure 2, only one special figure is displayed on hold.

If there is a hold in the special figure 2 (step S436; YES), the special figure 1 start port switch process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is no suspension in FIG. 2 (step S436; NO), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter is “0” (step S437). The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 when they remain inside the variable winning device 35.
If the remaining ball counter is not “0” (step S437; NO), the special figure 1 start port switch process is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is “0” (step S437; YES), it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 start opening winning flag (step S438). The special figure 1 start opening winning flag is set (set) when a winning is made in one of the first starting winning openings (left start opening, right start opening) 33a, 33b. In step S438, the special figure 1 start opening prize flag is determined because the special figure 1 start opening prize flag is the start of one of the first start winning openings (left start opening, right start opening) 33a, 33b. This is because it is determined whether or not a game ball has already won a prize opening.

If there is a special figure 1 start opening winning flag (step S438; YES), a game ball has already been won at one of the first starting winning openings (left start opening, right start opening) 33a, 33b. Then, it is determined that the special figure 1 start opening prize flag is set, and it is not necessary to set the special figure 1 start opening prize flag again, so the special figure 1 start opening switch process is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is no special figure 1 start opening prize flag (step S438; NO), it is necessary to set the special figure 1 start opening prize flag in accordance with the current start winning, so the process proceeds to step S439 and the special figure 1 start is started. Set the mouth prize flag.
Next, the fluctuation pattern random number prepared in step S425 in the hard random number acquisition process described above is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step S440). The variation pattern random number is a random number that determines how the special display variation is displayed on the collective display device 50. Next, the special symbol random number is extracted (step S441), and the extracted special symbol random number is saved in the special symbol 1 random number storage area of the RWM (step S442). After step S442, the special figure 1 start port switch process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Start Switch Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 start port switch process (step S412) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure 2 start opening switch process is a process performed when there is an input to the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening).

As shown in FIG. 32, in the special figure 2 start opening switch passing process, first, information on the number of winnings to the start opening switch to be monitored among the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening) is displayed. 1 is loaded (step S451), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S452), and whether the output count overflows is loaded. Determination is made (step S453).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step S453; NO), the updated value is saved in the start port 2 signal output number area of the RWM (step S454), and the process proceeds to step S455. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step S453; YES), the process proceeds to step S455.
In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port 2 signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by updating “+1”, and it is determined that the output count overflows. Therefore, if the looped and loaded value becomes “0”, it is determined that the number of outputs overflows, so that the saving is not performed.

If it progresses to step S455, it will be determined whether the special figure 2 pending | holding number is less than an upper limit. As described above, in this embodiment, only the special figure 2 is displayed, and only one special figure hold display is performed. Therefore, the upper limit value of the special figure 2 hold number = 1.
If the special figure hold count is not less than the upper limit value (step S455; NO), the special figure 2 start port switch common process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is less than the upper limit (step S455; YES), the special figure 2 hold number to be updated is updated by "+1" (step S456), and the special figure 2 hold number is handled. A decoration hold number command is prepared (step S457). The decoration hold number is displayed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300, and the information display 45 displays the hold number in FIG. 2 as the decoration hold number. In this case, there can only be a decoration hold number command with the hold number = 1. In addition, by the light emission aspect of the light emitting members for decoration (LED etc.) provided in the decoration member (the member for decoration arrange | positioned around the 2nd start prize winning opening 34) which comprises the 2nd start winning prize opening 34, You may make it alert | report that there is the special figure 2 hold number.
Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step S458). As a result, the decoration hold number command is sent to the effect control device 300 and the information display unit 45 displays the hold number in FIG. 2 as the decoration hold number.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern random number prepared in step S425 in the hard random number acquisition process described above is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step S459). The variation pattern random number is a random number that determines how the special display variation is displayed on the collective display device 50. Then, the special symbol random number is extracted (step S460), and the extracted special symbol random number is saved in the special symbol 2 symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step S461). After step S461, the special figure 2 start port switch process is terminated.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step S372) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 33, in the big winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left big winning opening switch 103 (step S471). The left big winning port switch 103 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43a in the variable winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the first accessory device 51 having a seesaw structure. If there is an input to the left big prize opening switch 103 (step S471; YES), the process proceeds to step S472 and the big prize opening count update process is performed. The big prize opening count is to count the game balls that have flowed into the variable prize winning device 35 (that is, the big prize winning opening) when the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable prize winning device 35 are opened. Therefore, if there is an input to the left big winning opening switch 103 (step S471; YES), the big winning opening count is updated by "+1". After step S472, the process proceeds to step S473. On the other hand, if there is no input to the left big prize opening switch 103 (step S471; NO), the process jumps to step S473.

In step S473, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the right big prize opening switch 104. The right big prize opening switch 104 is arranged in a space near the base end of the movable member 43b in the variable prize winning device 35, and detects a game ball flowing into the first accessory device 51 having a seesaw structure. If there is an input to the right big prize opening switch 104 (step S473; YES), the process proceeds to step S474 to perform the big prize mouth count update process. Accordingly, if there is an input to the right big prize opening switch 104 (step S473; YES), the big prize mouth count is updated by "+1". After step S474, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is no input to the right big prize opening switch 104 (step S473; NO), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Large winnings count update process]
Next, the details of the big prize opening count update process (steps S472 and S474) in the above-described big prize mouth switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 34, in the big prize opening count update process, first, when the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable prize winning device 35 are released, the game balls that flow into the variable prize winning device 35 (that is, the big prize winning mouth) Load the number-of-award winning component signal output count, which is the number of times that information related to the number of winnings to the left big winning port switch 103 and the right big winning port switch 104 is output to the management device outside the pachinko machine 1 ( In step S481, the loaded value is updated by “+1” (step S482). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of winning prize signal output times overflows (step S473).
When the number of winning prize signal output times does not overflow (step S483; NO), the updated value is saved in the bonus winning signal output count area of the RWM (step S484), and the process proceeds to step S485. . On the other hand, in the case where the number of outputs of the prize winning number signal overflows (step S483; YES), the process proceeds to step S485.
In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the prize winning signal output count area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by updating “+1”, and it is determined that the number of winning prize signal output times overflows. Therefore, if the looped and loaded value becomes “0”, it is determined that the number of times the prize winning signal is output overflows, so that the saving is not performed.

In step S485, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 35 serving as a big winning opening is being released. This is to determine whether or not the process is in a state where the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 serving as a big winning opening are easily opened to accept a game ball.
In the present embodiment, the variable prize winning device 35 corresponds to a so-called big prize opening. Therefore, the variable prize winning device 35 is referred to as a big prize winning opening, and the large winning opening is opened while the movable members 43a and 43b are open in the variable prize winning device 35. This is referred to as medium.
If the big prize opening is not open (step S485; NO), the process proceeds to step S486, and if the big prize opening is open (step S485; YES), the process jumps to step S489. When the processing proceeds to step S486, it is determined whether or not a large winning opening (variable winning device 35) is in the process of remaining balls. This is to monitor whether or not the game ball that has won the variable winning device 35 as a big winning prize exits from the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63 and remains in the variable winning device 35. It is determined whether or not processing is in progress.
If it is not in the process of processing the winning ball remaining ball (step S486; NO), the process proceeds to step S487, and if it is being processed in the winning game port remaining ball (step S486; YES), the process jumps to step S489.

In step S487, it is determined whether the small hit release process is being performed. This is because when the game ball is fitted and supported in the V winning recesses 68a and 68b formed in the heaven rotating body 67 of the heavenly acting device 66 in the grand prize opening (the variable winning device 35) and falls into the special winning area 69, Depending on the lottery lottery result, it will be a big hit (16R big hit, per 7R or per 3R), but here all of the start winning openings (first start winning openings 33a, 33b, second start winning opening 34) It is determined whether or not the process is in a state where the movable members 43a and 43b in the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) are opened with small hits and are easy to accept game balls in the start game with small hits accompanying the win To do.
If the small hit release process is not in progress (step S487; NO), the process proceeds to step S488. If the small hit release process is in progress (step S487; YES), the process jumps to step S489.

In step S488, it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed. This is because, when a small hit occurs and the starting game is being performed, the game balls that have won the big prize opening (variable prize winning device 35) are released from the heaven inflow space 62 and the hell inflow space 63 to the outside. Then, it is determined whether or not the process of monitoring whether or not the variable winning device 35 remains in the inside is in progress.
If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step S487; NO), the big prize winning count update processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step S487; YES), the process proceeds to step S489.
In step S489, a special winning mouth count command is prepared. This is because, when the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 serving as the big winning opening are opened, the left big winning port switch 103 for counting the game balls flowing into the variable winning device 35 (that is, the big winning port) and A command is prepared for outputting information related to the number of winnings to the right big winning opening switch 104 to the effect control device 300. Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step S490). As a result, the command prepared in step S489 is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect such as displaying the number of winning game balls to the big prize opening on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. Will be displayed.

After step S490, it is then determined whether or not a special winning opening (variable winning device 35) is being opened (step S491). If it is not in the big prize opening process (step S491; NO), it will progress to step S492, and if it is in the big prize opening process (step S491; YES), it will branch to step S493.
In step S492, it is determined whether a small hit release process is in progress. If the small hit release process is not in progress (step S492; NO), the big prize opening count update process is terminated. On the other hand, if the small hit release process is being performed (step S492; YES), the process proceeds to step S493.
In step S493, the winning prize count is updated by “+1”. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of winning prize counts is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, “9”) (step S494).
When the number of winning prizes does not exceed the upper limit (step S494; NO), the process jumps to step S498. Also, when the number of winning prizes exceeds the upper limit (step S494; YES), the special winnings game processing timer area is cleared to “0” while keeping the number of winning prizes at the upper limit (step S494). S495), the process proceeds to step S496.

In step S496, the upper limit value is loaded from the middle process control pointer upper limit value area per special figure, and the value loaded in the middle process control pointer area per special figure is saved (step S497). After step S497, the big prize opening count update process is terminated.
Here, the processing of step S497 is performed because the winning prize opening count number reaches the upper limit value, and the opening / closing operation of the winning prize opening during the round (that is, the opening / closing operation of the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning prize device 35). In order to forcibly terminate, for example, a maximum of 18 opening / closing operations), the value of the mid-process control pointer for the special figure being controlled is rewritten to the upper limit value at the end of the operation (see below). 46) and the “big hit timing chart” shown in FIG. 52).
As the upper limit value, “any one of 0, 2, and 54” is set depending on the opening pattern of the special winning opening. Along with the timer clear in step S495, the process for closing the special winning opening is immediately performed (after returning to the special figure game process).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S494 that the number of big prize winning counts is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step S494; NO), the process jumps to step S498. In step S498, the big prize winning opening (variable prize winning device 35) is being opened. It is determined whether or not there is. If the big prize opening release process is not in progress (step S498; NO), the big prize opening count update process is terminated. Further, if the special winning opening opening process is in progress (step S498; YES), the process proceeds to step S499, where the number of special winning openings is the same as the number of stopper solenoid operation changes (for example, the number of stopper solenoid operation changes = 5). It is determined whether or not.
In the stopper solenoid control process, the bonus component 204 for driving the bat member 53 up and down in the first bonus device 51 is controlled to provide information advantageous to the player (e.g. Since the bat member 53 is driven upward to roll into the hell inflow space 63 by rolling the bridge main body 80 of the 1 accessory device 51 and the processing for producing the information) is performed, etc. The number for changing the operation of the stopper solenoid is the number for changing the stopper solenoid operation. Then, when the special winning opening count reaches a specific value, the stopper solenoid operation is changed.

  If the winning prize count is not the same as the number of stopper solenoid operation changes (step S499; NO), the winning prize count updating process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of winning prizes is the same as the number of stopper solenoid operation changes (step S499; YES), the value of the latter half of the big hit operation is saved in the stopper solenoid control pointer area (step S500). Next, “0” is cleared in the stopper solenoid control timer area (step S501). As a result, when the number of winning prize counts reaches a specific value, the stopper solenoid operation is changed, and the stopper solenoid control is terminated when the value of the latter half of the big hit operation has elapsed. After step S501, the big prize opening count update process is terminated.

[Specific area switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the specific area switch monitoring process (step S373) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 35, in the specific area switch monitoring process, it is first determined whether or not the specific area is valid (step S511). A specific area switch 111 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the special prize area 69 is arranged inside the variable prize apparatus 35, and when the specific area switch 111 detects that the game ball has passed through the special prize area 69, The jackpot is confirmed as the V prize, and the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are operated.
Even if the specific area switch 111 is illegally passed through the game ball, it is not recognized as a regular V prize. Therefore, if the game ball passes the specific area switch 111 only under certain conditions, The conditions for qualifying as a V prize are as follows.
The special figure game process number is a process for releasing a small hit and the special figure game process number is a small hit remaining ball process. A case where the game ball passes through the specific area switch 111 while the specific area is valid is recognized as a regular V prize.

If the specific area is not valid (step S511; NO), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if the specific area is valid (step S511; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the specific area switch 111 (step S512).
The presence of input to the specific area switch 111 means that the specific area switch 111 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the special prize area 69 is arranged inside the variable prize apparatus 35, and the game ball has passed through the special prize area 69. This is a state in which the game control apparatus 100 has an input of a detection signal when the specific area switch 111 detects this and the signal is turned on.
That is, the specific area switch 111 detects that the game ball has passed the special prize area 69.
If there is no input to the specific area switch 111 (step S512; NO), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the specific area switch 111 (step S512; YES), it is determined whether or not the game ball has already passed through the specific area (step S513). If the game ball has already passed through the specific area (step S513; YES), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the game ball has not passed through the specific area (step S513; NO), the presence information is saved in the specific area passing flag area (step S514). Next, a specific area passing command is prepared (step S515), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S516). Thereby, when the game ball passes through the special winning area 69 inside the variable winning apparatus 35, the specific area switch 111 detects it and a specific area passing command is prepared and sent to the effect control apparatus 300. As a result of the control of the effect control device 300 being displayed on the information display 45 such that V is won (in addition, decoration of the board decoration device 351), the player is notified. After step S516, the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Special figure power-on operation processing]
Next, details of the special figure power-on operation process (step S382) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure power-on operation process is executed only when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure power-on operation process, first, it is determined whether or not the M1 control pointer is a stop operation (step S521).
In this embodiment, two accessory motors 81 (first motor) and an accessory motor 72 (second motor) are arranged as accessory motors. The accessory motor 81 (first motor) drives the bridge body 80 in the seesaw-type first accessory device 51 up and down. The accessory motor 72 (second motor) drives the rotation of the heavenly rotating body 67 in the heavenly agent device 66.
The M1 control pointer described above is a pointer for controlling the accessory motor 81 (first motor). On the other hand, the M2 control pointer described later is a pointer for controlling the accessory motor 72 (second motor).

If the M1 control pointer is a stop operation (step S521; YES), it is then determined whether or not the M2 control pointer is a stop operation (step S522). If the M2 control pointer is a stop operation (step S522; YES), the process proceeds to step S523.
If the M1 control pointer is a stop operation (step S521; YES) and the M2 control pointer is also a stop operation (step S522; YES), the accessory motor 81 (first motor) and the accessory motor 72 ( It is determined that both of the second motors) are stopped at the initial position. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the normal process of the special figure game can be started, and the processes after step S523 are executed.
In this embodiment, two accessory motors are arranged, which are an accessory motor 81 (first motor) and an accessory motor 72 (second motor). As described above, the special figure power-on operation process is executed only when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. When the game is completed and stopped at the initial position, the routine processing of the special figure game is started. For this reason, when the determinations in steps S521 and S522 are both YES, it is determined that the confirmation setting that the accessory motor 81 and the accessory motor 72 are in the initial positions has been completed.
If there is no such processing, there is a possibility that the game game will start to progress in a state where the accessory motor 81 and the accessory motor 72 are not in a normal position (initial position). On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the initial position setting for the accessory motor 81 and the accessory motor 72 is not completed, the special figure game does not start.

Returning to the flow, if both the determinations in step S521 and step S522 are YES, the process proceeds to step S523, the value of the M1 normal operation is saved in the M1 control pointer area (step S523), and the M1 control timer area is set to “0”. "Is cleared (step S524).
Next, similarly, the value of the M2 normal operation is saved in the M2 control pointer area (step S525), and the M2 control timer area is cleared to “0” (step S526).
Next, “1” is set as the processing number of the special figure game (step S527). As a result, next time, the process shifts to the special figure normal processing. Next, the number (here, “1”) set in step S527 is saved in the special figure game process number area (step S528). After step S528, the special figure power-on operation process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the M1 control pointer is not in the stop operation (step S521; NO) or when the M2 control pointer is not in the stop operation (step S522; NO), the accessory motor 81 or the accessory motor 72 is not in the initial position and Since the position confirmation setting is not completed, the special figure power-on operation processing is terminated in any case. Therefore, in this case, the process does not shift to the special figure normal processing of the special figure game.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the initial position setting of the accessory motor 81 and the accessory motor 72 is not completed, the special figure game does not start and the routine does not proceed to the special figure routine processing. The product motor 81 and the accessory motor 72 can be operated, and a stable game game can be provided to both the player and the game store.
In the present embodiment, the accessory motor 72 controlled by the M2 control pointer rotates the heaven rotator 67 in the heavenly accessory device 66, and the heaven rotator 67 has two V winning recesses 68a and 68b. Is formed. Then, when the sphere that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 fits into any of the V winning recesses 68a and 68b and passes through the special winning area 69, a big hit is generated.
In this case, the accessory motor 72 controlled by the M2 control pointer always repeats the same operation during the game. Therefore, the operation of the accessory motor 72 is set only in the process of step S525 except for the initial position detection operation (set when the power is turned on).

It should be noted that the control is not limited to the control in the present embodiment, and the heavenly rotating body 67 in the heavenly acting apparatus 66 may be controlled so as to always rotate (for example, the rotation starts at the same time as the power is turned on, and then the constant rotation) Continue).
In addition, for example, control may be performed so that the disc-like member constituting the heavenly rotating body 67 in the heavenly agent device 66 repeats a reciprocating motion in which it tilts to the left and right. In this way, the heavenly rotating body 67 repeats a reciprocating motion that tilts to the left and right, so that the movement of the game ball fitting into the V winning recesses 68a and 68b becomes complicated, and the excitement and excitement of the player can be enhanced. it can.
Of course, the present invention is not limited to the above-described modification. For example, the accessory motor 81 arranged in the first accessory device 51 changes its operation in accordance with the progress of the game (that is, the inclination of the bridge body 80 is changed to the accessory. As the motor 81 is driven and changed), the control content (for example, temporarily reverse rotation or temporary rotation) of the accessory motor 72 arranged in the heavenly accessory device 66 is also adjusted in accordance with the progress of the game. It is also possible to switch between a plurality of control contents such as stopping. By doing so, since both the accessory motor 81 and the accessory motor 72 change the operation in accordance with the progress of the game, the contents of the game game become various and the game can be enjoyed more.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (step S383) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 37, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere counter is “0” (step S531). The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 when they remain inside the variable winning device 35.
If the remaining ball counter is “0” (step S531; YES), it is determined that a normal game game can be started immediately because no game ball remains in the variable winning device 35, and in step S532. It is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 start opening prize flag. If there is the special figure 1 start opening prize flag (step S532; YES), it is determined that the game ball has won one of the first start winning openings 33a and 33b, and the start condition of the special figure 1 is satisfied, and step S538. Branches to, and special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed. Thereby, the variable display game of FIG. 1 is started by the collective display device 50. After step S538, the special figure routine processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is no special figure 1 start opening winning flag (step S532; NO), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step S533). This is to determine whether or not there is such a hold since only one hold is permitted when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 34. If the special figure 2 hold number is not “0” (step S533; YES), there is a special figure 2 hold, and then the special figure 2 hold number is updated by “−1” (step S534).
Next, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step S535), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S536). Thereby, the decoration special figure reservation number command is sent to the effect control apparatus 300, and the effect display relating to the decoration special figure is performed on the information display 45 as a gaming state under the control of the effect control apparatus 300.
Next, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is performed (step S537). As a result, the variable display game of FIG. 2 is started by the collective display device 50. After step S537, the special figure routine processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is not “0” (step S531; NO), it is determined that the normal game game cannot be started immediately because the game ball remains in the variable winning device 35, Jump to step S539.
In addition, when the special figure 2 hold number is “0” in step S533 (step S533; NO), it is determined that there is no special figure 2 hold, so that it is not possible to start the game game accompanying the start winning, Jump to S539.
In step S539, it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started. If the customer waiting demo has not started (step S539; NO), a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step S539). S540).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step S541), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S542). Thus, the customer waiting demonstration command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display relating to the customer waiting demonstration is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. After step S542, the process proceeds to step S543.
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started (step S539; YES), the process jumps to step S543.

In step S543, “1” is set as the process number (step S543), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “1” is saved) (step S544), and the special figure is usually displayed. The process ends.
In this way, by checking the number of reserved special figure 2 that is permitted to be held, if the number of reserved special figure 2 is not “0”, an effect display regarding the decorative special figure is performed on the information display 45. Then, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S537) is executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is more than the first special figure variation display game. Priority control means for preferential execution

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step S538) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game.
It should be noted that the first special figure variation display game is the special figure 1 among the LED segments in the collective display device 50 when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 33a, 33b (first starting opening). It is a variable display game played by the special figure 1 display to display.
As shown in FIG. 38 (a), first, a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step S551). The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S552) related to the setting of the FIG. 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. Next, a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed (step S553), and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Is performed (step S554).
Next, “2” is set as the process number (step S555), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “2” is saved) (step S556).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step S557), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step S558). As a result, the special-figure 1 fluctuation signal is turned on. Next, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step S559), and the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step S560). As a result, the variable display game of FIG. 1 is started by the collective display device 50, and the blinking control of FIG. 1 is performed.
Next, the special figure 1 start opening winning flag is cleared (step S561), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step S537) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game.
The second special figure variation display game is a special figure 2 of the LED segments in the collective display device 50 when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening). It is a variable display game played by the special figure 2 display.
As shown in FIG. 38 (b), first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step S571). The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S572) related to the setting of the stop symbol (symbol information) in FIG. 2 is performed. Next, a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed (step S573), and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. Is performed (step S574).
Next, “2” is set as the process number (step S575), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “2” is saved) (step S576).

  Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step S577), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step S578). As a result, the special signal 2 fluctuation signal is turned on. Next, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step S579), and the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (step S580). Accordingly, the collective display device 50 starts the variable display game of FIG. 2 and the flashing control of FIG. 2 is performed. After step S580, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S552) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is a process for setting the stop symbol (symbol information) of the special figure 1.
As shown in FIG. 39A, first, a random number for determining the stop symbol of special figure 1 is loaded from the special figure 1 random number storage area (step S591), and the special figure 1 random number storage area is set to "0". "Is cleared (step S592). Next, a small hit symbol table is set (step S593), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired, and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step S594). By this process, one of 50 symbol numbers from 0 to 49 is selected.

Next, a special symbol 1 small hit stop symbol information table is set (step S595), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S596). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol in the special symbol 1 display that displays the special symbol 1 among the LED segments in the collective display device 50. In the special figure fluctuation display game, only one of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is changed (that is, special figure 1 and special figure 2 do not change simultaneously), so the area for storing the stop symbol pattern is a special figure. Both 1 and special figure 2 are common in the stop symbol pattern area, and are the same area (see step S616 described later).
Next, the small hitting motion determination information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the small hitting motion determination information area (step S597). The small hitting motion determination information is information for determining whether to perform a small hitting operation of opening once or twice.

Next, the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special winning opening information area (step S598). The big winning opening information is information for determining whether to control the opening of the movable members 43a and 43b of the big winning opening (variable winning device 35) corresponding to any hit operation per 16R big hit, 3R or 7R. .
Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S599), and the prepared decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step S600). It should be noted that the decorative special figure command prepared in step S599 is distinguished so that it can be determined which of the special symbols 1 or 2 is the stop symbol pattern.
Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step S601). As a result, the decoration special figure command is sent to the production control apparatus 300, and the production display corresponding to the decoration special figure command related to the special figure 1 is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the production control apparatus 300. become. After step S601, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S572) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is a process for setting the stop symbol (symbol information) of the special figure 2.
As shown in FIG. 39B, first, a random number for determining the stop symbol of special figure 2 is loaded from the special figure 2 symbol random number storage area (step S611), and the special figure 2 symbol random number storage area is set to "0". "Is cleared (step S612). Next, a small hit symbol table is set (step S613), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired, and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step S614). By this process, one of 50 symbol numbers from 0 to 49 is selected.

Next, a special symbol 2 small hit stop symbol information table is set (step S615), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S616). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol 2 display for displaying the special symbol 2 among the LED segments in the collective display device 50. In the special figure fluctuation display game, only one of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is changed (that is, special figure 1 and special figure 2 do not change simultaneously), so the area for storing the stop symbol pattern is a special figure. Both 1 and special figure 2 are common in the stop symbol pattern area, and are the same area (same as step S596 described above).
Next, the small hitting motion determination information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the small hitting motion determination information area (step S617). The small hitting motion determination information is information for determining a small hitting motion that is opened twice.

Next, the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special winning opening information area (step S618). The big winning opening information is information for determining whether to control the opening of the movable members 43a and 43b of the big winning opening (variable winning device 35) corresponding to any hit operation per 16R big hit, 3R or 7R. .
Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S619), and the prepared decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step S620). It should be noted that the decorative special figure command prepared in step S619 is distinguished so that it can be determined which stop symbol pattern is special figure 1 or special figure 2.
Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step S621). As a result, the decoration special figure command is sent to the effect control apparatus 300, and the effect display corresponding to the decoration special figure command related to the special figure 2 is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control apparatus 300. become. After step S611, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process (steps S553 and S573) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
The variation pattern setting process sets a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game.
Note that the variation pattern is not limited to the example as in the present embodiment. For example, the first half variation pattern which is a variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state, and the special figure variation display after the reach state is reached. It may consist of the latter half variation pattern that is the variation mode until the end of the game, and the first half variation pattern may be set after the latter half variation pattern is set first.
As shown in FIG. 40, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group address table is set (step S631). Next, a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag and the stop symbol pattern is acquired and prepared (step S632).

Next, a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number storage area and prepared (step S633). The loaded random number (variation pattern random number) is a random number for determining the variation pattern of Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 by lottery. Next, “0” is cleared in the target variation pattern random number storage area (step S634).
In the variation pattern setting process, random number loading from the target variation pattern random number storage area and “0” clearing of the target variation pattern random number storage area may be performed separately as in the flow of this embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed at once using an exchange command. In the case of performing all at once, for example, a register to be loaded is set to “0” in advance, and processing such as exchanging each other is performed. Such a deformation process is not limited to the application to the processes of steps S633 and S634 in the variation pattern setting process, but can be applied to a process in which information is loaded into an area and information is cleared.

Next, a 2-byte sorting process is performed (step S635). The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the variation pattern number of the special figure variation display game from the variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern random number.
Next, the fluctuation pattern number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the fluctuation pattern number area (step S636). By this processing, the variation pattern of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is set based on the fluctuation pattern number. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern that is a game execution mode.
After step S636, the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (steps S554 and S574) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
The variation start information setting process is for setting variation start information in the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game.
As shown in FIG. 41, in the change start information setting process, a change time value table is set (step S641), a change time value corresponding to the change pattern number is acquired, and saved in the special figure game process timer area (step S641). S642). In the present embodiment, there are 40 variations in total.
Thereafter, a variation command corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step S643), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S644). As a result, the change command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the start of change of the decoration special figure related to the special figure 1 or the special figure is displayed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control apparatus 300. Will be done.
After step S644, the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number) for the special figure 2, a decorative special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a special figure. A variation command including information regarding the variation pattern of the variation display game is listed, and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step S384) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 42, in the special figure changing process, first, “3” is set as the process number (step S651), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “3” is saved). (Step S652). As a result, in the routine for the next special figure game process, “3” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the special figure display process (step S385).
Next, the display time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S653). Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step S654). As a result, the special signal 1 fluctuation signal is turned off. Further, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step S655). As a result, the special signal 2 fluctuation signal is turned off.
Next, the stop flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step S566), and then the stop flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step S567). After step S567, the special figure changing process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step S385) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 43, in the special figure display mid-process, first, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step S661). Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step S662). As a result, a decoration special figure command is sent to the effect control apparatus 300, and the display of the decoration special figure related to the special figures 1 and 2 is displayed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control apparatus 300. An effect display is performed.
Next, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step S663), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S664). As a result, a small hit fanfare command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an effect display related to the small hit fanfare is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300.

Next, the value of the small hitting operation is saved in the stopper solenoid control pointer area (step S665), and thereafter, the stopper solenoid control timer area is cleared to “0” (step S666).
The value of the small hitting operation is set to determine whether to perform the operation of opening the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 continuously twice or the operation of releasing once.
In addition, the stopper solenoid control process controls the accessory solenoid 204 for driving the bat member 53 up and down in the first accessory device 51 to provide information advantageous to the player through a lamp notification or the like (the game ball is the first one). This is a process for producing information, etc., in which the bat member 53 is driven upward to prevent the rolling of the bridge body 80 of the one-function device 51 from flowing into the hell inflow space 63. is there.
In step S665, the stopper solenoid control pointer is set according to the value of the small hitting operation. Therefore, the bat member 53 in the first accessory device 51 is driven up and down to play a game advantageous to the player. It will be.
Next, it is determined whether or not the small hitting operation is opened twice (step S667). This is because the small hits may be opened once or twice, but when such a small hit occurs, whether or not the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 perform an operation of opening continuously twice. Is determined.

If the small hit operation is not opened twice (step S667; NO), the start value of one open is saved in the middle process control pointer area per special figure (step S668) and the middle process control pointer upper limit value per special figure The upper limit value of opening once is saved in the area (step S669). In this case, “0” is set as the start value for the one-time opening, and “0” is set as the upper limit value. Thereby, the operation | movement which open | releases movable member 43a, 43b in the variable prize-winning apparatus 35 once is performed. After step S669, the process proceeds to step S670.
On the other hand, if the small hit operation is opened twice (step S667; YES), the start value of the double opening is saved in the middle process control pointer area per special figure (step S671) and the middle process control pointer per special figure. The upper limit value opened twice is saved in the upper limit value area (step S672). In this case, “0” is set as the start value for double opening, and “2” is set as the upper limit value. Thereby, the operation | movement which opens the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable prize-winning apparatus 35 twice continuously is performed. After step S672, the process proceeds to step S670.

In step S670, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing. This is because the special figure 1 is displayed among the LED segments in the collective display device 50 in accordance with the winning of the game balls to the first start winning openings (left start opening, right start opening) 33a, 33b. It is determined whether or not the special figure change is performed on the display. If the special figure 1 is changing (step S679; YES), a signal relating to the start of the special figure small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S673), and then the process proceeds to step S674.
Special Figure 1 Signals related to the start of small hits include the following, all of which are on.
・ Special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on ・ Special electric accessory 1 in operation signal is turned on ・ Conditioning device operation area 1 effective signal is turned on ・ Continuous equipment operating device operation area 1 effective signal is on On the other hand, fluctuation of special figure 1 If it is not medium (step S670; NO), a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S675), and then the process proceeds to step S674.
Special Figure 2 Signals related to the start of small hits include the following, all of which are on.
・ Turn on special symbol 2 small hit signal ・ Turn on special electric accessory 1 active signal ・ Turn on condition device activation area 1 valid signal ・ Turn on continuous action equipment activation area 1 valid signal

In step S674, a small hit opening operation start command is prepared, and subsequently, an effect command setting process is performed (step S676). Thereby, a small hit release operation start command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an effect display related to the start of the small hit release operation is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300.
Next, “4” is set as the process number (step S677), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “4” is saved) (step S678). Thereby, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “4” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the small hit release process (step S386).
Next, the small hit release time is saved in the special game process timer area (step S679). The small hit opening time is set to 400 ms, for example. Next, the on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S680). As a result, the first big prize opening solenoid 201 and the second big prize opening solenoid 203 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to open according to the small hit release time. .

Next, the specific area passing flag area is cleared (step S681), and the special winning prize count area is cleared (step S682). Since the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to open according to the small hitting opening time, it is expected that game balls will win the variable winning device 35 (large winning opening). In addition, the specific area passing flag corresponding to the output of the specific area switch 111 that detects that the game ball has passed through the special winning area 69 is cleared in advance, and the number of the big winning mouth count is also cleared. .
Next, the initial value (for example, 128 ms) of the output timer is saved in the accessory count signal control timer area (step S683), and the fraud monitoring non-period monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step S684). These set the period for outputting the number-of-functions signal as one of various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 152, and during the small hitting operation, it is not the big prize opening fraud monitoring period. A process for removing the fraud monitoring period is performed. After step S684, the special figure displaying process is terminated.

[Processing when small hits are open]
Next, the details of the small hit release process (step S386) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 44, in the small hit release process, first, a special control hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step S691). Next, the value of the loaded control pointer per special figure is compared with the small hit operation end value, and it is determined whether or not the loaded special control pointer value per special figure is equal to or larger than the small hit operation end value (step S692). ). This compares the value of the loaded control pointer during the special figure with the upper limit value for ending the small hitting operation, and determines whether or not the value has become larger.
If the value of the loaded control pointer during the special chart is not equal to or smaller than the small hit operation end value (step S692; NO), a small hit operation transition setting process is performed (step S693). Thus, at the time of a small win, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to be released for a certain period of time, and a game in which a game ball wins a prize at the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) is performed. Note that the opening control of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 includes opening once and opening twice, and details of the operation will be described later.

Next, the control pointer for special figure is updated by “+1” (step S694), a command for small hitting operation corresponding to the special control pointer for special figure is prepared (step S695), and then an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S696). Thereby, the command during the small hitting operation is sent to the effect control device 300, and the display corresponding to the fact that the small hitting operation is being performed is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. . After step S696, the small hit opening process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer during the loaded special figure is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step S692; YES), the process branches to step S697, and the processing number is set to “5” (step S697). The process number is saved in the figure game process number area (here, “5” is saved) (step S698). Thereby, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “5” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the small hit remaining sphere process (step S387).
Next, a command for closing the big hit prize winning opening is prepared (step S699), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S700). As a result, a command for closing the small winning big prize opening is sent to the effect control apparatus 300, and the display corresponding to the closing of the big winning prize opening at the small hit is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control apparatus 300. It will be. After step S700, the small hit opening process is terminated.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hitting operation transition setting process (step S693) in the above-described small hitting releasing process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 45, in the small hit operation transition setting process, first, branch determination is performed using the middle control pointer per special figure (step S711). In this branch determination, the branch destination differs depending on whether the middle control pointer per special figure is “0” or “1”.
That is, if the control pointer during special figure is “0”, the process branches to step S712, and the wait time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S712). The wait time is an interval period between the first opening and the second opening when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened twice at the time of a small hit. It is set to 1000 ms (see FIG. 46). Next, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S713). Thereby, the first big prize opening solenoid 201 and the second big prize opening solenoid 203 are turned off, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to be closed. After step S713, the small hit motion transition setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the control pointer during special figure is “1”, the process branches to step S714 to save the small hit release time in the special figure game processing timer area (step S715). The small hit release time is a period during which the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened at the time of the small hit, and the small hit release time is set to 400 ms, for example (see FIG. 46). Next, the on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S715). As a result, the first big prize opening solenoid 201 and the second big prize opening solenoid 203 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to be opened.
Next, an output timer initial value (for example, 128 ms) is saved in the accessory count signal control timer area (step S716). This is to set a period for outputting the number-of-functions signal as one of various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 152, and since it is not the big prize opening fraud monitoring period during the small hitting operation, A process for removing the fraud monitoring period is performed. After step S716, the small hit motion transition setting process is terminated.

[Timing chart of small hit operation]
Next, a specific example of the small hit operation will be described with reference to the timing chart of the small hit operation shown in FIG.
In FIG. 46, in the small hitting operation, there are a case where the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once and a case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened twice. FIG. 46A shows a case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once, and FIG. 46B shows a case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened twice.
First, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state), and predetermined A predetermined mode of opening operation is performed once after a lapse of time (here, 400 ms has elapsed). Therefore, in the case of releasing once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened for 400 ms, and the small amount of the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within this period. A hit operation is performed. In addition, the information display 45 that displays the effect state is provided with a display time (100 ms in this case) for informing that there is an operation of opening once.

When the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once and then closed, the control pointer per special figure becomes zero. The small hit remaining sphere time starts from the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once and then closed, and the small hit remaining sphere time becomes a period of “1900 ms + α”. The period “α” continues until the game ball is completely removed from the variable winning device 35. For example, if there is a remaining ball in the variable winning device 35, the remaining ball is removed from the variable winning device 35. It will continue until it is cut. Therefore, the period “α” is not a fixed period, but is a variable period that continues until the game ball is completely removed from the variable winning device 35.
Next, when “1900 ms + α” as a small hit remaining sphere time elapses, an operation is performed such that the small hit ending time exists for a predetermined time (here, 100 ms) from the elapsed timing. The small hit ending time is, for example, a period during which an effect display for notifying the information display 45 of the small hit ending is performed.
Observing with the player's line of sight, the small hit remaining ball time “1900ms + α” starts from the timing when the movable members 43a, 43b are opened once and then closed, and then the small hitting ending time (100ms) continues without a break. The ending period is a continuous period obtained by adding the small hitting remaining sphere time “1900 ms + α” and the small hitting ending time (100 ms), that is, 2000 ms.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened twice, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state), The opening operation in a predetermined manner is repeated twice after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, 400 ms has elapsed). In this case, the first opening period of the movable members 43a and 43b is, for example, 400 ms. Subsequently, the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after the elapse of 400 ms, and then a predetermined wait time (1000 ms) is provided as an interval period. In this period, the movable members 43a and 43b continue to be closed, and at the same time as the predetermined wait time is finished, the second opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b is performed. The opening period of the second movable members 43a and 43b is also 400 m, for example. Therefore, in the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened for 400 ms, and the operation is performed twice with a predetermined wait time. Then, a small hitting operation is performed in such a manner that the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within the period in which the opening operation is performed twice. Further, the information display 45 for displaying the effect state is provided with a display time (100 ms in this case) for informing that there is an operation of opening twice in advance.

In the case of the two-time opening operation as described above, the control pointer = 0 per special figure when the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after the first opening. Then, a predetermined wait time (1000 ms) is reached from the timing at which the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after being opened once, and the second opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b is started simultaneously with the end of the predetermined wait time. . At this time, when the movable members 43a and 43b start to be opened for the second time, the control pointer per special figure becomes 1.
Thereafter, the small hit remaining ball time starts from the timing when the second opening period of the movable members 43a and 43b elapses and closes, and the small hit remaining ball time becomes a period of “1900 ms + α”. The period of “α” is continued until the game ball is completely removed from the variable winning device 35, and this has the same property as that in the case of the one-time opening operation described above.
Next, when “1900 ms + α” as a small hit remaining sphere time elapses, an operation is performed such that the small hit ending time exists for a predetermined time (here, 100 ms) from the elapsed timing. The small hit ending time is, for example, a period during which an effect display for notifying the information display 45 of the small hit ending is performed.
Similarly, in the case of the twice-opening operation, when observed with the player's line of sight, the small hit remaining ball time “1900 ms + α” starts from the timing at which the movable members 43a and 43b are closed once and then closed, and thereafter, the small time without a break. Since the hitting ending time (100 ms) continues, the apparent ending period is a continuous period obtained by adding the small hitting remaining sphere time “1900 ms + α” and the small hitting ending time (100 ms), that is, 2000 ms.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball process (step S387) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 47, in the small hit remaining sphere process, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere counter is “0” (step S721), and if the remaining sphere counter is not “0” (step S721; NO), the small hit remaining ball processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is “0” (step S721; YES), it is determined that there is no remaining ball in the variable winning device 35, and the stop operation value is saved in the stopper solenoid control pointer area (step). S722). Next, “0” is cleared in the stopper solenoid control timer area (step S723). As a result, when there is no remaining ball in the variable winning device 35, the stopper solenoid operation is stopped and the stopper solenoid control is ended.

Next, a small hitting ending command is prepared (step S724), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S725). As a result, a small hit ending command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an effect display corresponding to the small hit ending is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300.
Next, “6” is set as the process number (step S726), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “6” is saved) (step S727). Thereby, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “6” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the small hit end process (step S388).
Next, the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special game process timer area (step S728), and the big prize count area is cleared (step S729). At the end of the small hitting operation, the small hitting ending time is set to produce the ending, and the game ball winning count to the big winning opening (variable winning device 35) is cleared, and the next time It prepares for the hit operation (including both big hits and small hits). Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step S730).
Signals relating to the end of the small hitting operation include the following signals, all of which are off.
・ Special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off ・ Special symbol 2 small hit signal is turned off ・ Condition device operation area 1 valid signal is turned off ・ Substantial action device working area 1 valid signal is turned off After step S730, small hit remains End the ball process.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (step S388) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 48, in the small hit end process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a passage through a specific area (step S741). This is because a specific area switch 111 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the special prize area 69 is arranged inside the variable prize apparatus 35, and the specific area switch 111 detects that the game ball has passed through the special prize area 69. Then, since it is the structure where a big hit lottery is performed as a V prize, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area switch 111.
If there is no game ball passing through the specific area (step S741; NO), the process branches to step S755, "1" is set as the process number (step S755), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (here, "1" is saved) (step S756). As a result, in the routine for the next special figure game process, “1” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the special figure routine process (step S383).
Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S757).
The signals relating to the end of the small hit are as follows, and all of them are in an off state.
The special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off. The special symbol 2 small hit signal is turned off. Then, the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step S758), and the small hit end processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is a game ball passing through the specific area (step S741; YES), a command is loaded from the decoration special command area and prepared (step S742), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S743). As a result, a decoration special figure command is sent to the effect control apparatus 300, and the decoration special figure command (for example, a decoration special figure command for producing a big hit) is displayed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control apparatus 300. A corresponding effect display will be performed.

Next, a big hit fanfare command is prepared (step S744), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S743). As a result, a big hit fanfare command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an effect display corresponding to the big hit fanfare command is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect display for notifying the big hit with the fan fur) ) Will be performed.
Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the external information output data area (step S746). As a result, information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as information on opening of the big prize opening is output to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal (external information shown in FIG. 4).
Signals corresponding to the big prize opening information include the following signals, all of which are on.
・ "Big hit signal 1" is turned on for all big hits ・ "Big hit signal 2" is turned on for 16R big hits Next, "7" is set as the processing number (step S747), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area ( Here, “7” is saved) (step S748). Thereby, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “7” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the fan fur / interval process (step S389).

Next, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 15 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S749), and the specific area passing flag area is cleared (step S750). Next, a signal relating to the start of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step S751).
Signals related to the start of jackpot include the following, all of which are on.
The condition device operating signal is turned on. The accessory continuous actuator operating signal is turned on. Next, an initial value (for example, “1”) is saved in the round number area (step S752). This is for counting the number of rounds of jackpot. Next, the number that is a big hit is saved in the game state display number area (step S753). Next, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step S754), and the small hit end processing is ended.

[Fan fur / interval processing]
Next, details of the fan fur / interval process (step S389) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 49, in the fan fur / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step S761), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step S762). ), An effect command setting process is performed (step S763). As a result, a round command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an effect display corresponding to the round command (for example, an effect display for notifying the number of rounds in the special game state) is displayed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. ) Will be performed.
Next, the special winning opening opening time value corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step S764). The big winning opening opening time value is, for example, 800 ms or 200 ms, as will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the special winning opening release time value is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S765), and the special winning opening release information and the start value and upper limit value of the control pointer corresponding to the number of rounds are saved (step S766). . For example, as a mode of jackpot game, for example, when a full release is performed, the start value is 20, and the upper limit value is 54. When the rank-up release is performed, the start value is 2, and the upper limit value is 54. A start value of 0 and an upper limit value of 0 are set. Details of full release, rank-up release, and short release will be described later.
A specific example of the special winning opening and the control pointer will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the start value is saved in the middle control pointer area per special figure (step S767), and the upper limit value is saved in the middle control pointer upper limit area per special figure (step S767). Next, the value of the big hit operation is saved in the stopper solenoid control pointer area (step S769), and the stopper solenoid control timer area is cleared to “0” (step S770). Thereby, when the stopper solenoid control pointer reaches the value of the big hit operation (that is, when the big hit operation is started), the stopper solenoid operation is changed and the stopper solenoid control during the big hit operation is started. .
Next, “8” is set as the process number (step S771), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “8” is saved) (step S772). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “8” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the special winning opening open process (step S390).

Next, the on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S773). As a result, the first big prize opening solenoid 201 and the second big prize opening solenoid 203 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to open according to the big hit release time.
Next, a fraud monitoring non-period monitoring flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step S775). This is a process for removing the fraud monitoring period because it is not the big prize opening fraud monitoring period during the big hit operation. Next, a signal related to the start of opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S776).
Signals related to the opening of the big prize opening are as follows.
-Turn on the special electric accessory 1 operation signal After step S776, the fan fur / interval processing is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (step S390) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 50, in the special prize opening opening process, first, a special control pointer is loaded and prepared (step S781). Next, the value of the loaded control pointer per special figure is compared with the big hit operation end value, and it is determined whether or not the value of the loaded special pointer per special figure is greater than or equal to the big hit operation end value (step S782). This compares the value of the loaded control pointer during the special chart with the upper limit value for ending the big hit operation, and determines whether or not the value has become larger.
If the value of the loaded special pointer per special figure is not equal to or larger than the big hit operation end value (step S782; NO), the special control per special figure is updated by "+1" (step S783), and the big hit operation transition setting process is performed. (Step S784). Since the value of the control pointer during special figure is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value for ending the big hit operation, various types of big hit operations are performed according to the value of the control pointer during special figure (details will be described later). ). After step S784, the special winning opening open process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the loaded control pointer during the special figure is greater than or equal to the big hit operation end value (step S782; YES), the process branches to step S785 to determine whether or not the final round is the big hit. If it is not the last round of big hit (step S785; NO), the remaining ball processing time for other than the final round (for example, 796 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S786). Next, an interval command is prepared (step S787), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S788). Thereby, the interval command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the interval command is performed on the information display unit 45 under the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, the effect display for notifying the interval between rounds). ) Will be performed.
After step S788, the process proceeds to step S789.

On the other hand, if the final round is a big hit in step S785 (step S785; YES), the process branches to step S790. Then, the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 ms) for the final round is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S790). Next, a big hit ending command is prepared (step S791), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S791). Thereby, the jackpot ending command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the jackpot ending command is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, the effect of notifying the jackpot ending) Display) will be performed.
After step S792, the process proceeds to step S789.
When the process proceeds from step S788 or step S792 to step S789, the value of the stop operation is saved in the stopper solenoid control pointer area (step S789) and the stopper solenoid control timer area is cleared to “0” (step S793). As a result, when the stopper solenoid control pointer reaches the value of the stop operation (that is, when the big hit operation is finished), the stopper solenoid operation is changed and the stopper solenoid control is finished.
Next, “9” is set as the process number (step S794), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “9” is saved) (step S795). As a result, in the routine for the next special figure game process, “9” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the winning prize remaining ball process (step S391).
Next, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S796). As a result, the first grand prize winning solenoid 201 and the second big prize winning solenoid 203 are turned off, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to stop. After step S796, the special winning opening opening process is terminated.

[Big hit action transition setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot movement transition setting process (step S390) in the above-described special winning opening opening process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 51, in the big hit operation transition setting process, first, branch determination is performed using the middle control pointer per special figure (step S801). In this branch determination, the control pointer during special figure is “even” or “odd” and the branch destination is different, and among “odd”, the control pointer during special figure is “odd numbers 3 to 17” and “19”. The branch destination is different from “odd numbers up to 53”.
That is, if the control pointer during the special figure is “even”, the process branches to step S802, and the wait time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S802). The wait time is an interval period between the current opening when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened at the time of big hit and the next opening. The wait time is set to 800 ms, for example. (See FIG. 52).
Next, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S803). Thereby, the first big prize opening solenoid 201 and the second big prize opening solenoid 203 are turned off, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to be closed. After step S803, the big hit operation transition setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the middle control pointer per special figure is “odd number”, the branch destination varies depending on the range of “odd number”. That is, if the control pointer during the special figure is “odd number from 3 to 17” among the “odd numbers”, the process branches to step S804, and the big hit rank up release time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S804). S804).
The big hit rank-up opening time is such that when the big hit, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to be released and a round game is performed a plurality of times. The period during which the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are in the open operation when the so-called 16R big hit rank-up game is performed (ie, release in one round game) Operating period). In this embodiment, the big hit rank-up opening time is set to 200 ms, for example (see FIG. 52).
Specifically, the big hit rank-up opening operation is performed in the 8th round (substantially the big 7th round since the first round is excluded) in the case of the 16R big hit that appears to be around 7R. In the case of winning that looks like a hit, it is performed in the fourth round (substantially the third round of the big hit).
Next, the on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S805). As a result, the first big prize opening solenoid 201 and the second big prize opening solenoid 203 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to open based on the big hit rank up opening time set in step S804. Will be. After step S805, the big hit operation transition setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the middle control pointer per special figure is “odd number from 19 to 53” among “odd numbers”, the process branches to step S806, and the big hit full release time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S804). ).
The jackpot full opening time is for all rounds that do not correspond to the above jackpot rank-up opening action of 16R jackpot, up to 7 rounds per 7R, and round games with full opening up to 3 rounds per 3R Is a period during which the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are in an opening operation (that is, an opening operation period in one round game). In step S806, the big hit full opening time is set to 800 ms, for example (see FIG. 52).
Next, the on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S807). As a result, the first big prize opening solenoid 201 and the second big prize opening solenoid 203 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are controlled to open based on the big hit rank up opening time set in step S806. Will be. After step S807, the big hit operation transition setting process is terminated.

[Timing chart of jackpot operation]
Next, a specific example of the jackpot operation will be described with reference to the timing chart of the jackpot operation shown in FIG.
In FIG. 52, the big hit operation has the following round modes.
Full Open This is a game mode in which the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to open in all rounds that do not correspond to the above-described jackpot rank-up opening operation of 16R jackpots.
・ Rank-up release Of the 16R jackpots, the 8th round is the round that appears around 7R (substantially the 7th round because the first round is excluded). This is a game mode that is played on the eyes (substantially the third round of the big hit). Accordingly, during a specific round game (during a specific round), an effect of suddenly being promoted to 16R jackpot is performed, resulting in a so-called 16R jackpot rank-up game.
・ Short Opening This is a game mode performed in 8-16 rounds per 7R and 4-16 rounds per 3R, and the open time of the movable members 43a, 43b of the variable winning device 35 is short, and it is substantially This is equivalent to a round without balls. In the case of 16R big hit, such short-circuit opening is not included.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the full opening is an operation of one round of big hits. When the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened ( An opening operation in a predetermined manner is performed once, such as a second state, and the closing operation is again performed after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, after 800 ms has elapsed).
Therefore, in the case of releasing once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened for 800 ms, and the big hit of the mode in which the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 35 can be made within this period. Operation is performed. A closing period (800 ms) in which the movable members 43a and 43b are closed until the next opening game is provided.
Then, the opening / closing control of the movable members 43a and 43b as described above is repeatedly performed 18 times in one whole round, and this 18 times opening / closing control is configured as one round. That is, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are in the form of (800 ms on + 800 ms off) × 18 times = 1 round game.

In the case of 16R big hit, the first game that generates a big hit does not correspond to a game with a big hit round, so the round with a big hit is substantially 15R.
In a big hit with full opening, the above-mentioned one round game is executed. When the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed in the final round of each round, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the big hit remaining ball time starts from the closing timing, The period is “796 ms”.
In this case, the remaining ball time (796 ms) is short, and even if there is a remaining ball in the variable winning device 35, the next round game is started. This is because there is a high possibility that the remaining ball will escape from the variable winning device 35 during execution of the next round game.
Next, the period until the transition to the next round game is an interval period (eg, 1204 ms).
Thus, in the big opening big hit, one round game as described above is repeatedly executed up to 15 rounds, and when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed in the final round of the 15 round games, FIG. As shown in (a), the jackpot remaining sphere time starts from the closing timing. Only in this case, the jackpot remaining sphere time becomes a period of “1900 ms” and is set to a longer time. This is because it takes a little longer time for the remaining balls in the final round of the 15-round game to escape from the variable winning device 35. When the remaining ball time (“1900 ms” elapses), the process shifts to a big hit end operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the rank-up release is performed in the round game before the 16R big hit rank-up (promotion) is performed.
Then, during a specific round game (during a specific round) in the middle of the big hit round game, an effect that suddenly is promoted to the 16R big hit is performed, so-called 16R big hit rank-up game (rank) Up).
In the round-up open round game, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once as the first half of the big hit, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (in the second state). Conversion), and a predetermined mode of opening operation is performed once after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, 200 ms has elapsed).
Therefore, in the case of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened only for 200 ms. A big hit operation in a mode that is a somewhat difficult situation is performed. Further, a closing period (800 ms) in which the movable members 43a and 43b are closed until the next open game is provided.
Then, the opening / closing control of the movable members 43a and 43b as described above is repeated nine times in the first half of one round.

Next, as the latter half operation of one round of jackpot, the same operation as the above-described full opening is performed. That is, in the latter half operation of the big round, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state), and a predetermined time has elapsed. A predetermined mode of opening operation is performed once after the closing operation is performed again (after 800 ms in this case).
Therefore, in the case of releasing once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened for 800 ms, and the big hit of the mode in which the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 35 can be made within this period. Operation is performed. A closing period (800 ms) in which the movable members 43a and 43b are closed until the next opening game is provided.
Then, the opening / closing control of the movable members 43a and 43b as described above is repeated 18 times in the second half of one round.
Therefore, in the whole round, it becomes a form of a round game including 27 opening / closing controls including the first half of 9 rounds and the latter half of 18 rounds. In this case, 27 opening / closing controls including the first half and the second half are configured as one round, and this round corresponds to a specific round in which a rank-up game is played. In the middle of this specific round game (during a specific round), the game form in which the second half of the 18 rounds is suddenly promoted to 16R jackpot, and this is so-called 16R. Corresponds to a big hit rank-up game (rank-up release).
Accordingly, in the rank-up game, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are in the form of (200 ms on + 800 ms off) × 9 times = 1 half in the first half of one round, and (800 ms on in the second half of one round). +800 ms off) × 18 times = 1 second half of the round, and the opening / closing control of the movable members 43a and 43b is performed 27 times as a whole.
Next, when moving to the next round game, it was already ranked up and promoted to 16R jackpot, so from the next time, the same round game as the full release as described above will be performed, the round before the rank up A big hit game is played in which the total number of rounds, which is the sum of the number and the number of rounds after the rank-up, is 16.

Even in the rank-up opening as described above, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed in the final round of each round, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the jackpot remains from the closing timing. The ball time starts, and the jackpot remaining ball time is a period of “796 ms”. In this case, the remaining ball time (796 ms) is short, and even if there is a remaining ball inside the variable winning device 35, the game proceeds to the next round game. This is because there is a high possibility that the remaining ball will escape from the variable winning device 35 during execution of the next round game.
Next, the period until the transition to the next round game is an interval period (eg, 1204 ms).
In this way, as described above, the jackpot game after ranking up is repeatedly executed up to the final 15 rounds, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are played in the final round of the 15 round games. 52 is closed, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the jackpot remaining sphere time starts from the closing timing. Only in this case, the jackpot remaining sphere time becomes a period of “1900 ms”, and is set to a longer time. . This is because it takes a little longer time for the remaining balls in the final round of the 15-round game to escape from the variable winning device 35. When the remaining ball time (“1900 ms” elapses), the process shifts to a big hit end operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), the short opening is different from the full opening, in which the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once as the first round of big hits. The movable member 43a, 43b is opened once (converted to the second state), and a predetermined mode of opening operation is performed once after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, 200 ms has elapsed).
Therefore, in the case of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened only for 200 ms. A big hit operation in a mode that is a somewhat difficult situation is performed.
Then, as described above, after the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened and closed once, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), the big hit remaining ball time starts from the closing timing. The jackpot remaining ball time is a period of “796 ms”.
In this case, the remaining ball time (796 ms) is short, and even if there is a remaining ball in the variable winning device 35, the next round game is started. This is because there is a high possibility that the remaining ball will escape from the variable winning device 35 during execution of the next round game.

Next, the period until the transition to the next round game is an interval period (for example, 4 ms), and the interval period here is extremely short.
In addition, in the case of the big hit of the short opening, the above-described one round game is repeatedly executed from the predetermined round to the final round, and when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 are closed in the final round of the final round game, As shown in 52 (c), the jackpot remaining sphere time starts from the closing timing, and only in this case, the jackpot remaining sphere time becomes a period of “1900 ms” and is set to a longer time. This is because it takes a little longer time for the remaining ball in the final round of the last round game to escape from the variable winning device 35. When the remaining ball time (“1900 ms” elapses), the process shifts to a big hit end operation.
In this way, the short opening is used in 8 rounds after 7R and 4 rounds after 3R, and the opening time of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 is short, and it is substantially This is equivalent to no round.
In addition, after 8 rounds per 7R, 4 rounds per 3R and after are short-circuited, and in effect, rounds without a play are performed after the 8th round and after the 4th round.
Further, in the case of around 7R, the above-described full opening is performed up to 7 rounds, and the short opening operation is performed in the subsequent rounds (from 8 rounds to 16 rounds). Similarly, in the case of 3R, the above-described full release is performed up to 3 rounds, and a short release operation is performed in the subsequent rounds (from 4 rounds to 16 rounds).
Therefore, in the case of around 7R or 3R, the full opening is performed until the middle round, and then the transition to the short opening round is made, so that the player recognizes that the jackpot operation is (substantially) over. Will end up.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step S391) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 53, in the winning prize remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is the final round of the big hit game (for example, if it is 16R big hit, it is 16 rounds) (step S811), If it is not the final round of the game (step S811; NO), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step S812). Next, the winning time opening information and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step S813). The contents of the next round game are determined by the settings of steps S811 and S812.

Next, “7” is set as the process number (step S815), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “7” is saved) (step S816). Thereby, in the routine for the next special figure game process, “7” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call by the process number, and the process branches to the fanfare / interval process (step S389).
Next, a signal related to the completion of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817).
Signals related to the start at the end of the big prize opening are as follows and are in an off state.
-Turn off signal during operation of special electric accessory 1 After step S187, the winning ball remaining ball processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is the final round of the big hit game (step S811; YES), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter is “0” (step S818). If the remaining ball counter is not “0” (step S818; NO), since there is still a remaining ball in the variable winning device 35, the process does not proceed to the big hit end process (step S392), and the big winning port remaining ball The process ends. Then, the routine is repeated, and when the remaining ball counter becomes “0” (step S818; YES), since there is no remaining ball, “10” is set as the process number (step S819), and the special figure game process The process number is saved in the number area (here, “10” is saved) (step S820). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “10” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the big hit end process (step S392).

Next, the big hit ending time (for example, 610 ms) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S821), and a signal relating to the end of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S822).
Signals related to the completion of the big prize opening are as follows.
-Turn off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 Next, the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step S823). At the end of the jackpot operation, the jackpot ending time is set to produce the ending, and the winning count of the game ball to the big prize opening (variable winning device 35) is cleared, It prepares for the operation (including both big hits and small hits). Next, the round number area is cleared (step S824). Next, the big prize opening release information area is cleared (step S825), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (826). This is a process for returning to the fraud monitoring period because the big hit operation ends and the winning prize fraud monitoring period starts again. After step S8260, the winning prize remaining ball processing is terminated.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step S392) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 55, in the jackpot end process, first, “1” is set as the process number (step S831), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, “1” is saved) ( Step S832). As a result, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “1” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the special figure routine process (step S383). The normal number is saved in the status display number area (step S833). Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step S834). Thereby, information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as a signal related to the end of the big hit is output to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal (external information shown in FIG. 4).
The signals relating to the end of the big hit include the following, all of which are off.
-Turn off 1 signal of big hit-Turn off 2 signals of big hit Next, a signal related to the end of big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S835).
The signals relating to the end of the big hit include the following, all of which are off.
-Turn off the condition device operating signal-Turn off the accessory continuous operation device operating signal After step S835, the jackpot end processing is terminated.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, the command setting process in each of the other processes including the command setting process (step S458) in the above-described special figure 2 start port switch process and the command setting process (step S516) in the specific area switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. To do. The command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.
In this command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step S841), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S842). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S842; YES), the process returns to step S841 to repeat the loop. This waits until the production serial transmission buffer is not full.
On the other hand, if the production serial transmission buffer is not full (step S842; NO), the process proceeds to step S843 and command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S843).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step S844), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S845). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S845; YES), the process returns to step S844 to repeat the loop. This waits until the production serial transmission buffer is not full.
On the other hand, if the production serial transmission buffer is not full (step S845; NO), the process proceeds to step S846 to write command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer. After step S846, the effect command setting process is terminated.
Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. Note that the command may be transmitted to the payout control apparatus 200 by serial communication.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process (step S394) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 56, in the symbol variation control process, first, in step S851, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag (read from (a) below) of the target symbol is varying.
Here, the information defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in advance is as follows.
(B) Address of fluctuation control flag area (b) Address of symbol display table (for fluctuation) (c) Address of symbol display table (for stoppage) Information defined on symbol display table (for fluctuation) Is as follows.
(D) Address of variable symbol number area (e) Display data (there are the number of variable symbol numbers)
(F) Address of segment area Furthermore, the information defined on the symbol display table (for stopping) is as follows.
(G) Stop symbol number area address (h) Display data (the number of stop symbol numbers)
(Re) Segment area address

The check result of step S851 is determined in step S852, and if it is changing (YES), the process proceeds to step S853, and the symbol display table (for variation) (above (b)) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired. . Next, in step S854, the target blinking fluctuation timer is updated by “−1”, and it is checked whether the time is up (flashing fluctuation timer = 0). The check result in step S854 is determined in step S855. If the time has not expired (NO), the process jumps to step S858 to display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area (the above (e), ( Get h)).
Next, the process proceeds to step S859, where the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (above (F), (L)), and the routine is terminated.
Therefore, at this time, since the variation timer of the target symbol does not time out, the display data of the symbol corresponding to the symbol number for variation is saved in the target segment area, and the routine is repeated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S855 that the target flashing variation timer has timed up (YES), the process proceeds to step S856, and the initial value of the flashing control timer (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the target flashing control timer area. Next, after updating the target variation symbol number (above (d)) by “+1” in step S857, the process proceeds to step S858, and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area (above (e), (Chi)). Next, the process proceeds to step S859, where the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (above (F), (L)), and the routine is terminated.
Therefore, at this time, the flashing control timer initial value is saved by the time-up of the target flashing variation timer, the target variation symbol number is updated, and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is displayed. It will be saved in the target segment area.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation control flag of the target symbol is not changing but is stopped in step S852 (NO), the process branches to step S860, and the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol (above) Next, in step S861, display data corresponding to the value of the target stop symbol number area is acquired, and then the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step S859). Exit.
Therefore, at this time, since the fluctuation control flag of the target symbol is stopped from being changed, the symbol display data for stoppage is saved in the target segment area.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, details of the 2-byte sorting process (step S635) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
The sorting process is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the special-figure variation display game from a selection table such as the special-figure 1 variation pattern selection table or the special-figure 2 variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern random number.
FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the 2-byte distribution process when the size of the random number used for distribution is 2 bytes. The 2-byte data is, for example, “0” to “49999”.
When this routine is started, it is first checked in step S881 whether or not the top data in the target selection table is an unallocated code.
Here, the selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern group. For example, if there is no need for distribution, a code without distribution is defined at the top.
If it is determined that the top data of the selection table is a code without distribution (step S882; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step S887), and the distribution process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S882 that the top data in the selection table is not a code without distribution (step S882; NO), one distribution value first defined in the selection table is acquired (step S883). .
Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step S883 from the random number value checked in step S881 (for example, the value of the variation pattern random number) (step S884), and then calculated. It is then determined whether or not the new random value is smaller than “0” (step S885).

If it is determined that the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step S885; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step S886), the process returns to step S883 to repeat the loop. .
That is, in step S883, after the distribution value specified next in the selection table is acquired, the new random value is subtracted by subtracting the distribution value from the new random value determined in step S884 as the random value. Calculate (step S884). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step S885).
The above processing is repeatedly executed until it is determined in step S885 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step S885; YES). As a result, any one variation pattern group is selected from at least one variation pattern group defined in the selection table.
If it is determined in step S885 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step S885; YES), the process proceeds to step S887, and the data address corresponding to the distribution result is updated. (Step S887), the distribution process is terminated.

Thus, for example, the fluctuation pattern random number is used to determine whether or not the reach state is generated in the special figure fluctuation display game, and to determine the reach fluctuation mode in the special figure fluctuation display game when the reach state occurs. Therefore, the above selection table corresponds to a variation group selection table such as a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table or a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table.
The selection table such as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table or the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table is used in the special figure fluctuation display game when the reach state occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game or when the reach state occurs. Depending on the type of reach (reach fluctuation mode), a plurality of types of latter half fluctuation pattern groups are defined, and the ROM 171B storing the fluctuation group selection table stores the first special figure and the second special figure in the special figure fluctuation display game. As the variation mode of the figure (identification information), a plurality of variation distribution information (variation pattern group) and respective distribution values according to each setting of a reachless variation mode in which no reach state occurs and a plurality of types of reach variation modes are predetermined Are stored in association with each other in this order.
Therefore, by executing this distribution process, if the top data of the selection table is not a code without distribution, a new value is generated based on the distribution value stored in the selection table and the random value related to the determination. By quickly calculating a random value and repeating the process of determining whether the new random value is less than the predetermined value “0”, any one of the plurality of variation pattern groups is quickly set. To be able to.

[Stopper solenoid control processing]
Next, details of the stopper solenoid control process (step S397) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the stopper solenoid control process, first, it is determined whether or not the stopper solenoid control pointer is a no-change code (step S891). If the stopper solenoid control pointer is a no-change code (step S891; YES), the stopper solenoid control process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the stopper solenoid control pointer is not a no-change code (step S891; NO), the stopper solenoid control timer is updated by "-1" (step S892), and whether or not the stopper solenoid control timer is "0". Determination is made (step S893). If the stopper solenoid control timer is not “0” (step S893; NO), the stopper solenoid control process is terminated and the routine is repeated.
If the stopper solenoid control timer is “0” (step S893; YES), a stopper solenoid control table is set (step S894), and a table address corresponding to the stopper solenoid control pointer is calculated (step S895).

Subsequently, the control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the stopper solenoid control pointer area (step S896). Next, a control timer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the stopper solenoid control timer area (step S897). Next, the output data of the next operation is acquired and saved in the stopper solenoid output data area (step S898).
Then, it is determined whether or not the left stopper solenoid output is on (step S899). If the left stopper solenoid output is not on (step S899; NO), the stopper solenoid control process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the left stopper solenoid output is on (step S899; NO), a left stopper on information command is prepared (step S900), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S901). As a result, the left stopper-on information command is sent to the effect control device 300, and information advantageous to the player (the game ball is a bridge of the first accessory device 51) on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. An effect display in which the bat member 53 is driven upward to roll around the main body 80 and flow into the hell inflow space 63 to inform the timing to prevent it is performed. After step S901, the stopper solenoid control process is terminated.
As described above, in the stopper solenoid control process, the accessory solenoid 203 for driving the pigeon member 52 up and down in the first accessory device 51 and the accessory solenoid 204 for driving the bat member 53 up and down are performed. In addition, information advantageous to the player by lamp notification or the like (by driving the bat member 53 upward so that the game ball rolls over the bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51 and flows into the hell inflow space 63, A process of producing information) that tells the timing to prevent is performed.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the segment LED editing process (step S73) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the following description of the flowcharts, “step A” is used as the step number.
The segment LED editing process is a process related to the segment LED provided in the collective display device 50 (FIGS. 2 and 10). As described above, the collective display device 50 displays a so-called special figure (this special figure), Furthermore, a special figure (this special figure) start memory hold display (sometimes referred to as a special figure hold display) and a game state display, for example, a plurality of indicators (for example, LEDs) as a light source (for example, The display is composed of one small lamp, or a special display such as a 7-segment display capable of displaying numbers. For example, among the LED segments in the collective display device 50, those that display the special figure 1 are arranged as a special figure 1 display, and those that display the special figure 2 are arranged as a special figure 2 display.
These displays are configured by, for example, a plurality of indicators (for example, one lamp or a seven-segment indicator) that use LEDs as the light source, and settings relating to driving of such a segment LED. The segment LED editing process is performed.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the segment LED editing process, first, a gaming state display table is set (step A1). The gaming status display table is for displaying the current gaming status, and data necessary for notifying the gaming status, such as whether or not a big hit, is set. Next, display data corresponding to the game state number is acquired and saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the game state display section in the collective display device 50) (step A2). Next, the special figure 2 hold number display table is set (step A3). The special figure 2 number-of-holds display table is for displaying the current special figure 2 on-hold status. For example, data necessary for informing the game state such as whether there is a special figure 2 hold is set. The
Next, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the special figure 2 hold indicator) (step A4). After step A4, the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Motor control processing]
Next, the motor control process (step S74) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this embodiment, two accessory motors 81 (first motor) and an accessory motor 72 (second motor) are arranged as accessory motors. The accessory motor 81 (first motor) drives the bridge body 80 in the seesaw-type first accessory device 51 up and down. The accessory motor 72 (second motor) drives the rotation of the heavenly rotating body 67 in the heavenly agent device 66.
A motor 1 control pointer described later is a pointer for controlling the accessory motor 81 (first motor). On the other hand, a motor 2 control pointer described later is a pointer for controlling the accessory motor 72 (second motor).

As shown in FIG. 60, in the motor control process, first, the address of the head area of the motor 1 control area is prepared (step A11). Next, the motor 1 operation table is prepared (step A12), and the motor 1 control pointer is loaded and retracted (step A13). Next, motor operation editing processing is performed (step A14). The motor operation editing process performs a ball biting process of the accessory motor 81 (first motor) using a motor 1 control pointer and a control timer (details will be described later).
Next, the retracted motor 1 control pointer is restored (step A15), and the value of the motor 1 control pointer area is compared with the restored control pointer (step A16). As a result of comparing the value of the motor 1 control pointer area with the restored control pointer, it is determined whether or not the restored control pointer has been updated (step A17). If the returned control pointer has been updated (step A17; YES), the process proceeds to step A18 to determine whether or not the motor 1 is in the start position. Information on whether or not the motor 1 is in the start position indicates that the bridge body 80 in the first accessory device 51 of the seesaw structure driven by the accessory motor 81 (first motor) is on the heaven side (right side of the player's eyes). This is information for informing the effect control device 300 (sub-board) that it starts to move in a direction inclined to the heaven inflow space 62 side.

On the other hand, if the returned control pointer is not updated (step A17; NO), the process jumps to step A22. Further, when the motor 1 is not in the start position (step A18; NO), the process jumps to step A22.
As described above, if the returned control pointer is updated (step A17; YES) and the motor 1 is in the start position (step A18; YES), the process proceeds to step A19, and the effect effect flag An effecting flag is saved in the area (step A19). Next, an effect start waiting time (for example, timer initial value = 100 ms) is saved in the accessory effect command timer area (step A20). Next, effect start information is saved in the accessory effect control information area (step A21). Thus, if the returned control pointer is updated and the motor 1 is in the start position, the driving of the accessory motor 81 (first motor) is controlled, and the first accessory device 51 of the seesaw structure is provided. The bridge body 80 is driven up and down. After step A21, the process proceeds to step A22.

When the process proceeds to step A22 via step A21, the returned control pointer is not updated (step A17; NO), and the process proceeds to step A22, and the motor 1 is not in the start position (step A18; NO). In the case of proceeding to step A22, in all cases, the address of the head area of the motor 2 control area is prepared in step A22 (step A22). Next, a motor 2 operation table is prepared (step A23), and a motor operation editing process is performed (step A24). The motor operation editing process is to perform a ball biting process of the accessory motor 72 (second motor) using the motor 2 control table (details will be described later).
Thus, the address of the head area of the motor 2 control area is prepared, the driving of the accessory motor 72 (second motor) is controlled using the motor 2 operation table, and the heavenly rotating body 67 in the heavenly accessory device 66 is controlled. Will be driven. After step A24, the motor control process is terminated.

[Motor operation edit processing]
Next, the motor operation editing process (steps A14 and A24) in the motor control process described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, in the motor operation editing process, it is first determined whether or not the target control pointer is a no-update code (step A31). If the target control pointer is a no-update code (step A31; YES), the motor operation editing process is terminated.
In the present embodiment, two target equipment devices are provided, namely, a first accessory device 51 and a heavenly accessory device 66. Among them, the first accessory device 51 has an accessory motor 81 (first object device). 1 motor), and the heavenly accessory device 66 is provided with the accessory motor 72 (second motor). Therefore, the “target” in the case of describing the target control pointer means that the accessory motor 81 (first motor) or the accessory motor 72 (second motor) that is the target of control in the motor operation editing process. It points to either.
On the other hand, if the target control pointer is not a no-update code (step A31; NO), the process proceeds to step A32, where it is determined whether or not the target control timer is “0”. If the target control timer is “0” (step A32; YES), the process jumps to step A56.
If the target control pointer is not a no-update code (step A31; NO) and the target control timer is not “0” (step A32; NO), the process proceeds to step A33, and the target control timer is set to “−1”. "Update (Step A33). Next, it is determined whether or not the target control timer is “0” (step A34). If the target control timer is not “0” (step A34; NO), the process jumps to step A45.
On the other hand, if the target control timer is “0” (step A34; YES), the process proceeds to step A35.

In step A35, it is determined whether or not the target control information is time value control. This is to determine whether the target control information controls the time value when performing motor control. If the target control information is time value control (step A35; YES), the process jumps to step A56.
On the other hand, if the target control information is not time value control (step A35; NO), the process proceeds to step A36, and the target ball biting process count is updated by "+1". This is because the target control information does not control the time value (that is, control for monitoring the state of the motor switch), but the target information set to the time value required to detect the motor switch or more Since the game timer has been updated until the control timer reaches “0”, there is a possibility that the game ball has caused any kind of ball biting, and therefore the target ball biting process count is updated by “+1”.
This is to count the number of times when the ball is bitten inside the first accessory device 51 or the heavenly accessory device 66.
When the ball is bitten, for example, the accessory motor 81 of the first accessory device 51 is reversely rotated to widen the gap between the bridge body 80 and the inner wall surface of the first accessory device 51, etc. If the process is performed, the ball biting is often eliminated. Further, for example, by performing a process such as reversely rotating the accessory motor 72 of the heavenly accessory device 66 to increase the distance between the heavenly rotating body 67 and the inner wall surface of the heavenly agent device 66, the ball biting is performed. Often resolved.
Next, the target ball biting process count is compared with an error occurrence determination value (for example, three times) to determine whether the target ball biting process count is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value (step A37).
In the drawings (FIG. 61, etc.), there is a case where “ball biting” is indicated, but this means the same as “ball biting”, and both expressions may be used in the field of gaming machines. There are so.
If the target ball biting process count is not equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value (step A37; NO), the process jumps to step A43, sets the target ball biting process flag (step A43), and uses the target ball as a control pointer. The next pointer is loaded when biting (step A44). After step A44, the process proceeds to step A60 (FIG. 62).

On the other hand, if the target ball biting process count is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value (step A37; YES), the process proceeds to step A38, where it is determined whether an error has already occurred in the ball bite (step A38). If the ball biting has not already occurred (step A38; NO), a feature error occurrence flag is saved in the target feature error state flag area (step A39) and a target feature error occurrence command is prepared. (Step A40). Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step A41). As a result, when the target ball biting process count is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value and the ball biting has not yet occurred, an accessory error occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300. Under the control of the control device 300, an effect display corresponding to the accessory error occurrence command (for example, a display for notifying the occurrence of an accessory ball biting error) is performed on the information display unit 45. After step A41, the process proceeds to step A42.
When the process proceeds to step A42, as in the case described above, the target ball biting process count is limited to an upper limit value (for example, upper limit value = error occurrence determination value (for example, “3” as described above)) (step A42), Subsequently, the target ball biting flag is set (step A43), and when the target ball biting next pointer is loaded as a control pointer (step A44), the process proceeds from step A44 to step A60 (FIG. 62).
On the other hand, if an error has occurred in the ball bite (step A38; YES), the process jumps to step A42 without executing the processes of steps A39 to A41, and executes the process of step A42. That is, at this time, the target ball biting process count is kept at the upper limit (step A42), the target ball biting process flag is set (step A43), and the target ball biting next pointer is loaded as a control pointer (step A43). Step A44) is performed.

Thus, if the target ball biting process count is not equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value, the target ball biting process count is kept at the upper limit value, the target ball biting process flag is set, and the target ball is set as a control pointer. The next pointer is loaded when biting.
On the other hand, if the target ball biting process count is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value, but the ball bite error has not yet occurred, save the target error occurrence flag in the target accessory error status flag area and select the target The accessory error occurrence command is prepared and an effect display corresponding to the accessory error occurrence command is performed on the information display 45.
If the target ball biting process count is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value and the ball bite error has already occurred, the target ball biting process count is kept at the upper limit and the target ball biting process is in progress. The flag is set, and the next pointer is loaded when the target ball is bitten as the control pointer.

On the other hand, as described above, the target control pointer is not a no-update code (step A31; NO), the target control timer is not “0” (step A32; NO), and then the target control timer is set to “−”. 1 ”is updated (step A33), and if the target control timer is not“ 0 ”(step A34; NO), it is described that the process jumps to step A45. Therefore, the case where the process jumps to step A45 will be described.
In step A45, it is determined whether or not the target control information is time value control. This is to determine whether the target control information controls the value of time when performing motor control. If the target control information is time value control (step A45; YES), the process jumps to step A70.
On the other hand, if the target control information is not time value control (step A45; NO), the process proceeds to step A46 to set a motor control information table (step A46) and calculate a table address corresponding to the control information (step A46). A47). Next, the address, monitoring bit data, and determination data of the switch control area of the motor switch to be monitored are acquired (step A48).
Here, the motor switch to be monitored refers to the switch that is currently monitored among the first motor switch 82 or the second motor switch 71.
The first motor switch 82 detects whether the accessory motor 81 in the first accessory device 51 tilts the bridge body 80 to the left or right. The second motor switch 71 detects the initial position of the accessory motor 72 in the heavenly accessory device 66.

After step A48, the process proceeds to step A49, and the state of the motor switch to be monitored is checked using the acquired data (step A49). As a result, the state of the first motor switch 82 or the second motor switch 71 that is currently monitored is checked.
Next, it is determined whether or not the next operation transition condition is satisfied (step A50). This is because the target control information is not time value control, a motor control information table is set, a table address corresponding to the control information is calculated, the address of the switch control area of the motor switch to be monitored, monitoring bit data, Since the determination data is acquired and the state of the motor switch to be monitored is checked using the acquired data, it is determined whether the transition to the next operation is possible.

If the next operation transition condition is not satisfied (step A50; NO), the process jumps to step A70 (FIG. 62). On the other hand, if the next operation transition condition is satisfied (step A50; YES), the target ball biting process count is cleared to “0” (step A51). Next, it is determined whether or not the ball bite error has already been released (step A52). If the ball bite error has already been released (step A52; YES), the process jumps to step A56.
On the other hand, if the ball biting error has not already been released (step A52; NO), the process proceeds to step A53, where the accessory error release flag is saved in the subject accessory error state flag area (step A53), and An object error cancel command is prepared (step A54). Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step A55). As a result, the state of the motor switch to be monitored is checked using the acquired data, and when the condition for transition to the next operation is satisfied, the target ball biting process count is cleared to “0”, The target accessory error cancel command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the accessory error cancel command is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, a ball biting error of an accessory). Display for notifying the release of). After step A55, the process proceeds to step A56.

When the process proceeds to step A56, the target control pointer is loaded (step A56), and it is determined whether or not the loaded control pointer is to perform the ball biting return operation (step A57). If the control pointer performs a ball bite return operation (step A57; YES), the target ball bite processing flag is cleared (step A58) and the target ball bite return pointer is loaded as a control pointer (step A58). A59). After step A59, the process proceeds to step A60.
On the other hand, if the control pointer does not perform the ball biting return operation (step A57; NO), the process jumps to step A60.
Proceeding to step A60, the address of the motor operation table corresponding to the control pointer is calculated (step A60), the control pointer is acquired (step A61), the control timer is acquired, and saved in the target control timer area (step A60). A62).

Next, control information is acquired, saved in the target control information area (step A63), excitation information is acquired, saved in the target excitation information area (step A64), and the target excitation timer area is cleared (step A63). A65).
Here, the excitation information is information for exciting the target motor (the first motor switch 82 or the second motor switch 71), that is, the on-operation (rotation drive).
Next, it is determined whether or not the control information is time value control (step A66). This is to determine whether the target control information controls the time value when performing motor control. If the target control information is time value control (step A66; YES), the process jumps to step A69. In step A69, the no-update code is saved in the next pointer area when the target ball is biting (step A69), and then the process proceeds to step A70.
On the other hand, if the control information is not the time value control (step A66; NO), the process proceeds to step A67, where the next ball biting pointer is acquired and saved in the target ball biting next pointer area (step A67). Next, the control pointer before update is saved in the target ball bite return pointer area (step A68), and then the process proceeds to step A70.
Here, the process from step A60 to step A68 sets the value of the return point when returning from the ball biting process.

When the process proceeds from step A68 or step A69 to step A70, it is determined whether or not the target excitation timer is “0” (step A70). If the target excitation timer is not “0” (step A70; NO), the target excitation timer is updated by “−1” (step A71), and it is determined whether or not the target excitation timer has become “0”. (Step A72). If the target excitation timer is “0” (step A72; YES), the process proceeds to step A73.
On the other hand, if the target excitation timer is “0” (step A70; YES), the process jumps to step A73.
If the target excitation timer is determined to be “0” in step A70 or the target excitation timer is determined to be “0” in step A72, the target excitation timer is “0” in all cases, and therefore step A73. Then, it is determined whether the target excitation information is stop information (step A73). If the target excitation information is stop information (step A73; YES), the output off data is saved in the target excitation data area (step A74), and then the motor operation editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the target excitation information is not stop information (step A73; NO), the process proceeds to step A75, a motor excitation information table is set (step A75), and the address of the table corresponding to the target excitation information is calculated. (Step A76), an excitation timer is acquired and saved in the target excitation timer area (Step A77).
Next, an excitation counter addition value is acquired and added to the target excitation counter (step A78). Next, the value after addition is corrected to a range of “0” to “3” (step A79).
Here, when the target motor (the first motor switch 82 or the second motor switch 71) is clockwise (CW), “+1” and “+2” are added values, and the motor is counterclockwise (CCW). In this case, “−1” and “−2” are added values.
For example, when the ball is caught, the accessory motor 81 of the first accessory device 51 is reversely rotated or forwardly rotated so that the bridge main body 80 and the inner wall surface of the first accessory device 51 are in contact with each other. This is because the ball biting is eliminated by performing a process such as widening the interval of.
Further, for example, a ball is obtained by performing a process such as reverse rotation or forward rotation of the accessory motor 72 of the heavenly accessory device 66 to widen the interval between the heavenly rotating body 67 and the inner wall surface of the heavenly accessory device 66 or the like. This is because biting is eliminated.
After step A79, the process proceeds to step A80 where the corrected value is saved in the target excitation counter area (step A80) and the motor excitation data table is set (step A81). Next, the address of the table corresponding to the target excitation counter is calculated (step A82), then the output data is acquired and saved in the target excitation data area (step A83). After step A83, the motor operation editing process is terminated.

[Function effect command editing process]
Next, the accessory effect command editing process (step S75) in the timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 62, in the accessory effect command editing process, it is first determined whether or not the accessory effect flag is being rendered (step A91). If the accessory effect flag is not in effect (step A91; NO), the accessory effect command editing process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the accessory effect flag is in effect (step A91; YES), the accessory effect command timer is updated by "-1" (step A92). Next, it is determined whether or not the accessory effect command timer is “0” (step A93). If the timer is not “0” (step A93; NO), the accessory effect command editing process is terminated. To do.
On the other hand, if the accessory effect command timer is “0” (step A93; YES), it is determined whether or not the accessory effect control information indicates “production start” (step A94). If the accessory effect control information indicates “effect start” (step A94; YES), the process proceeds to step A95, and processing related to the effect start is performed in subsequent steps A95 to A98. Does not instruct the “production start” (step A94; NO), the process proceeds to step A99, and the process related to the production end is performed in steps A99 to A103.

When the accessory effect control information instructs “start of effect” (step A94; YES) and the process proceeds to step A95, first, an accessory effect start command is prepared (step A95), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A96). Thereby, it will be sent to the effect production start command effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the effect production start command is started on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300.
Next, the effect time (the timer initial value of the effect time is set to, for example, 1600 ms) is saved in the accessory effect command timer area (step A97), and the effect end waiting information is saved in the accessory effect control information area ( Step A98).
For example, when the effect production of the first accessory device 51 is started by the processing of step A97 and step A98, when the effect time (for example, 1600 ms described above) has elapsed, the accessory motor in the first accessory device 51 The rotational drive of 81 is started, and the bridge body 80 having a seesaw structure starts to tilt toward the hell inflow space 63 side (left side). After step A98, the accessory effect command editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the accessory effect control information does not instruct “start of effect” (step A94; NO) and the process proceeds to step A99, first, an accessory effect end command is prepared (step A99). Command setting processing is performed (step A100). Thus, the effect effect end command effect control device 300 is sent to the effect display device 300, and the information display 45 ends the effect display in response to the effect effect effect end command by the control of the effect control device 300.
Next, the accessory effect flag area is cleared (step A101), and the accessory effect command timer area is cleared (step A102). Next, the accessory effect control information area is cleared (step A103).
For example, when the effect rendering of the first accessory device 51 is finished by the processing of step A102 and step A103, the rotation driving of the accessory motor 81 in the first accessory device 51 is finished, and the bridge body of the seesaw structure is completed. The vertical drive of 80 is stopped. After step A103, the accessory effect command editing process is terminated.

[Abnormal emission monitoring processing]
Next, the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S76) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 64, in the abnormal discharge monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left count switch (step A111). This is whether the input signal from the left big prize opening switch 103 (left count switch; the same applies hereinafter) detecting the winning to the variable prize winning device 35 is in the game control apparatus 100 (that is, the left big prize winning). Whether the mouth switch 103 has detected winning in the variable winning device 35).
Here, in order to detect a game ball flowing into the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35, a left large winning port switch 103 and a right large winning port switch 104 (see FIG. 11) are provided, and a variable winning is also provided. In order to detect game balls discharged from the device 35 to the outside, a left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 and a right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 are provided.
In this case, it is the remaining ball that monitors whether or not the game ball won in the variable prize winning device 35 passes outside from the heaven inflow space 62 and the hell inflow space 63 and remains in the variable prize winning device 35. Monitoring function.
In the present embodiment, the above mechanism is utilized as a function for monitoring abnormal discharge separately from the function for monitoring remaining spheres. That is, apart from monitoring whether or not it remains in the variable winning device 35, the left remaining ball outlet switch 112 or the like even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not open. When the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detects the discharge of the game ball, it is abnormal discharge, for example, an illegal winning to the variable winning device 35 (that is, the left big winning port switch 103 or the right big winning port switch 104 is played A state in which the discharge of the remaining sphere is detected even though the winning of the sphere has not been detected).
The abnormal discharge monitoring process shown in FIG. 64 monitors the abnormal discharge of the game ball as described above (for example, illegal winning to the variable winning device 35).

Returning to the flow, if there is an input to the left count switch (step A111; YES), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by “+1” (step A112), and then the process proceeds to step A113. On the other hand, if there is no input to the left count switch (step A111; NO), the process jumps to step A113.
In step A113, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the right count switch (step A113). This is whether the game control device 100 receives an input signal from the right big prize opening switch 104 (right count switch; the same applies hereinafter) that detects the winning to the variable prize winning device 35 (that is, the right big prize winning). Whether the mouth switch 104 has detected winning in the variable winning device 35).
If there is an input to the right count switch (step A113; YES), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by “+1” (step A114), and then the process proceeds to step A115. On the other hand, if there is no input to the right count switch (step A113; NO), the routine jumps to step A115.

When the process proceeds to Step A115, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 (Step A115). This is because the game control device 100 has an input signal from the left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 that detects a state in which the game ball is discharged from the hell inflow space 63 of the variable winning device 35 (ie, left The remaining ball discharge port switch 112 has detected a game ball discharged from the variable winning device 35).
If there is an input to the left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 (step A115; YES), it is determined whether or not the abnormal discharge counter is “0” (step A116).
Here, if the abnormal discharge counter is “0”, the left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 is the game ball regardless of the state where there is no winning to the variable winning device 35 through the processing of the above-described steps A111 to A114. For example, there is a possibility of illegal winning in the variable winning device 35. Therefore, if the abnormal discharge counter is “0” (step A116; YES), the process branches to step A121.
On the other hand, if the abnormal discharge counter is not “0” (step A116; NO), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by “−1” (step A117), and then the process proceeds to step A118.
If there is no input to the left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 (step A115; NO), the process jumps to step A118.

In step A118, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the right remaining sphere outlet switch 113 (step A118). This is because whether the game control device 100 has an input signal from the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 that detects a state in which the game ball is discharged from the heaven inflow space 62 of the variable winning device 35 to the outside (that is, the right The remaining ball discharge port switch 113 has detected a game ball discharged from the variable winning device 35).
If there is an input to the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 (step A118; YES), it is determined whether or not the abnormal discharge counter is “0” (step A119).
Here, if the abnormal discharge counter is “0”, there is no winning in the variable winning device 35 through the processing of the above-described steps A111 to A114, or there is a winning in the variable winning device 35. Even if the game ball discharge is detected by the remaining ball discharge port switch 112 and the abnormal discharge counter has returned to “0” and the winning process has been properly completed, Since the exit switch 113 has detected the discharge of the game ball, for example, there is a possibility of illegal winning to the variable winning device 35. Therefore, if the abnormal discharge counter is “0” (step A119; YES), the process branches to step A121.
On the other hand, if the abnormal discharge counter is not “0” (step A119; NO), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by “−1” (step A120), and then the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated.
Also, when there is no input to the right remaining ball discharge port switch 112 (step A112; NO), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated.

If it is determined that there is a possibility of abnormal discharge and the process proceeds to step A121, an abnormal discharge error flag area is prepared (step A121) and an abnormal discharge occurrence command is prepared (step A122). Next, a game stop error status update process is performed (step A123). As a result, an abnormal discharge error flag is set, a gaming state in which abnormal discharge has occurred is entered based on the abnormal discharge occurrence command, the game stop error status is updated, and an error is notified. After step A123, the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated.
As described above, when the left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 and the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detect the discharge of the game ball even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not opened, it is an abnormal discharge. Yes, for example, an illegal winning to the variable winning device 35 (that is, a state in which the discharge of the remaining ball is detected even though the left big winning port switch 103 and the right big winning port switch 104 have not detected the winning of the game ball) Therefore, processing for updating the game stop error status is performed.

[Game stop error status update process]
Next, the game stop error status update process (step A123) in the abnormal discharge monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 65, in the game stop error status update process, first, an error occurrence flag is saved in the target error flag area (step A131), and it is determined whether or not an error for game stop has occurred. (Step A132). If an error to stop the game has occurred (step A132; NO), the game stop error status update process is terminated. Therefore, in this case, a serious error that stops the game has occurred, and the game is stopped.
On the other hand, if an error for stopping the game has not occurred (step A132; YES), an error operating flag is saved in the game stop error state area (step A133). Next, a timer initial value (for example, 10 s) is saved in the game stop error control timer area (step A134). Next, effect command setting processing is performed (step A135). Thus, the prepared error command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an error effect display corresponding to the error command prepared by the information display unit 45 is performed under the control of the effect control device 300.

[Unauthorized monitoring process]
Next, the fraud monitoring process (step S77) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 66, in the fraud monitoring process, it is first determined whether or not a magnet fraud has occurred (step A141). This is to determine whether or not the magnetic sensor 115 is already turned on and an abnormal state in which abnormal magnetism is detected (that is, the occurrence of illegal magnetism) is in progress.
If the magnet is not illegal (step A141; NO), it is determined whether or not the magnetic sensor 115 is on (step A142). This is because the magnetic sensor 115 is turned on, that is, abnormal magnetism is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 115 and taken into the third input port 163 (input port 3) when the magnet is not illegally generated. (That is, whether a magnet fraud has occurred).
When the magnetic sensor 115 is on (step A142; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by “+1” (step A143), It is determined whether the timer has timed up (for example, confirmed at 32 ms) (step A144).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step A144; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms), a magnet fraud flag area is prepared (step A145) and the magnet A fraud occurrence command is prepared (step A146), and then game stop error status update correction is performed (step A147). Thereby, the prepared magnet fraud occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an error effect display corresponding to the magnet fraud occurrence command is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. . After step A147, the process proceeds to step A148.
On the other hand, if the magnet is illegal in step A141 (step A141; YES), the processing from step A142 to step A147 described above has already been executed, and the process jumps to step A148.
If the magnetic sensor 115 is not on (step A142; NO), it is determined that no magnet fraud has occurred since the magnetic sensor 115 does not turn on when no magnet fraud has occurred. The timer is cleared (step A149). Then, it progresses to step A148.
Further, if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired in step A144 (step A144; NO), the routine jumps to step A148 and the routine is repeated.

In step A148, it is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 114 is on (step A148). This is because the board radio wave sensor 114 is turned on, that is, an abnormal radio wave for the game board 30 is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 114 and taken into the third input port 163 (input port 3) ( In other words, it is determined whether a board radio wave positive has occurred.
When the panel radio wave sensor 114 is on (step A148; YES), that is, when an abnormal board radio wave is detected, a board radio wave fraud flag area is prepared (step A150) and a board radio wave fraud occurrence command is prepared ( Step A151) Subsequently, game stop error status update correction is performed (step A152). As a result, the prepared board radio wave fraud occurrence command is sent to the production control device 300, and an error production display corresponding to the board radio wave fraud occurrence command is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the production control device 300. become. After step A152, the process proceeds to step A1153.
On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor 114 is not on (step A148; NO), that is, if no abnormal panel radio wave is detected, the process jumps to step A153.

If it progresses to step A153, it will be determined whether the glass frame or the main body frame is open | released (step A153). This is because the opening of the glass frame 5 is detected by the glass frame opening detection switch 117 and, for example, it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is in progress based on whether an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set. Similarly, the opening of the main body frame 4 is detected by the main body frame opening detection switch 118, and it is determined whether a main body frame opening error is occurring, for example, based on whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set.
If the glass frame or the body frame is being opened (step A153; YES), the timer initial value is saved in the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer area (step A154). For example, 3s is set as the timer initial value. Accordingly, the vibration for 3 seconds after the glass frame 5 or the main body frame 4 is closed is not treated as illegal vibration. After step A154, the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, if the glass frame or the body frame is not being opened (step A153; NO), the process jumps to step A155.

In step A155, if the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step A155). Next, it is determined whether or not the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is “0” (step A156). If the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is not “0” (step A156; NO), the fraud monitoring process is terminated. Repeat routine.
On the other hand, if the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer is “0” (step A156; YES), it is determined whether or not the vibration sensor 116 is on (step A157). This is because the vibration sensor 116 is turned on, that is, whether improper vibration with respect to the game board 30 is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the vibration sensor 116 and taken into the third input port 163 (input port 3) (that is, Whether vibration positive has occurred).
If the vibration sensor 116 is not on (step A157; NO), that is, if no unauthorized vibration is detected, the unauthorized monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the vibration sensor 116 is on (step A157; YES), that is, when an improper vibration is detected, it is determined whether or not a special figure small hit is being made (step A158). If it is not in the special figure small hit (step A158; NO), the fraud monitoring process is terminated.
If the special figure is small hit (step A158; YES), it is determined that the vibration is illegal and the process proceeds to step A159 to prepare a vibration illegal flag area. In this case, when the special figure small hit is in effect, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened. In many cases, fraud such as hitting the game board 30 to vibrate with the intention of aiming for a big hit by fitting the game balls in the winning recesses 68a and 68b is often performed. This is because it is determined that the vibration is improper vibration.
Next, a vibration fraud occurrence command is prepared (step A160), and then game stop error status update correction is performed (step A161). Thus, the prepared vibration fraud occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an error effect display corresponding to the vibration fraud occurrence command is performed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. . After step A161, the fraud monitoring process is terminated.

(Launch control process)
Next, the firing control process (step S78) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 67, in the launch control process, first, it is determined whether or not an error for stopping the game has occurred (step A171). If an error to stop the game has occurred (step A171; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure game is in a special figure power-on operation process (step A172). If the special figure game is in the special figure power-on operation process (step A172; YES), the process branches to step A175, and the output data of the emission stop is saved in the emission permission signal area (step A175). Thereby, the launch of the game ball is stopped. After step A175, the firing control process is terminated.
This is because in the power-on operation process, the game is performed by returning the accessory motor 81 in the first accessory device 51 and the accessory motor 72 in the heavenly accessory device 66 to their initial positions in accordance with the power-on. This is to stop the launching of the game ball when the special figure game is in the special figure power-on operation process because it is in a state where it can be started.

If the special figure game is not in the special figure power-on operation process (step A172; NO), the process proceeds to step A173, and it is determined whether or not the ball engagement process of the motor 1 or the motor 2 is in progress.
Here, the motor 1 refers to the accessory motor 81, and the motor 2 refers to the accessory motor 72. If the ball biting process of the motor 1 or the motor 2 is in progress (step A173; YES), the process branches to step A175, and the output data of the firing stop is saved in the firing permission signal area (step A175). Thereby, the launch of the game ball is stopped. After step A175, the firing control process is terminated.
This is because, for example, when the ball engagement is caused inside the first accessory device 51 or the heavenly accessory device 66, the accessory motor 81 of the first accessory device 51 is rotated in the reverse direction, for example. Processing such as widening the space between the inner wall surface of the object device 51 and the like is performed to eliminate the bite of the ball, or, for example, the accessory motor 72 of the heavenly agent device 66 is reversely rotated, so that the heavenly rotating body 67 In order to stop the launch of the game ball during such a ball biting process, the ball bite is eliminated by performing a process such as widening the interval between the ball and the inner wall surface of the heavenly agent device 66 and the like. is there.

If the ball biting process of the motor 1 or the motor 2 is not in progress (step A173; NO), the process proceeds to step A174, and the output data of the launch permission is saved in the launch permission signal area (step A174). Thereby, the launch of the game ball is permitted. After step A174, the firing control process ends. Therefore, an error for stopping the game has not occurred (step A171; YES), the special figure game is not in the special figure power-on operation process (step A173; NO), and the ball biting process of the motor 1 or the motor 2 is performed. If not (step A; NO), the launch of the game ball is permitted.
On the other hand, if an error for stopping the game has occurred in step A171 (step A171; NO), the process branches to step A175, and the output data for stopping the firing is saved in the firing permission signal area (step A175). Thereby, the launch of the game ball is stopped. After step A175, the firing control process is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, the external information editing process (step S79) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S65), the winning switch / status monitoring process (step S67), the remaining ball monitoring process (step A68), the fraud monitoring process (step S77), and the like. Then, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set the information in an output buffer is performed.
As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, in the external information editing process, it is first determined whether or not a glass frame opening error has occurred (step A181). This is because the opening of the glass frame 5 is detected by the glass frame opening detection switch 117 and, for example, whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring is determined based on whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set.
If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step A181; NO), it is subsequently determined whether or not the main body frame opening error is occurring (step A182). This is because the opening of the main body frame 4 is detected by the main body frame opening detection switch 118, and it is determined whether a main body frame opening error has occurred, for example, based on whether an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set.
If the body frame opening error is not occurring (step A182; NO), the process proceeds to step A183, and the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A183). The door / frame opening signal is an opening signal of the glass frame 5 (door) and the front frame 4 (frame). As a result, the off data of the door / frame opening signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal board 152.
Next, the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A184). As a result, the off-data of the security signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal board 152. After step A184, the process proceeds to step A185.

On the other hand, if a glass frame opening error is occurring (step A181; YES) or a body frame opening error is occurring (step A182; YES), in either case, the process branches to step A186, The ON data of the frame release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A186). As a result, the ON data of the door / frame opening signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal board 152.
Next, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A187). This is because a gaming machine error status signal is output to the outside when a gaming machine error status of opening the door or frame occurs. Thereby, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A187, the process proceeds to step A185.

In step A185, if the security signal control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated. The security signal control timer is for outputting a security signal for a predetermined time when power is turned on by clearing the RAM, and a timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is set in step S27. The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer has become “0” (step A188). The security signal control timer is for outputting a security signal for a predetermined time when the power is turned on by RAM clearing. For example, 256 ms is set as the timer initial value in the RAM initial value setting process (for example, step S27). Set.
If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step A188; YES), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, it is determined whether or not fraudulent radio waves are occurring ( Step A189).
If the frame radio wave fraud has not occurred (step A189; NO), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A190). As a result, the off-data of the security signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal board 152. After step A190, the process proceeds to step A191.
On the other hand, if the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step A189; YES), the process branches to step A192 to save the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step A192). As a result, the ON data of the security signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal board 152. After step A192, the process proceeds to step A191.

When the process proceeds to step A191, it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality is occurring (step A191). The occurrence of a switch abnormality herein refers to an error such as a connector disconnection based on the switch abnormality detection signal 1 or the switch abnormality detection signal 2 described above. That is, as shown in FIG. 10, the switch abnormality detection signal 1 is output when a sensor or switch abnormality is detected in the proximity I / F 121a. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the switch abnormality detection signal 2 is output when an abnormality of a sensor or a switch is detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121b.
An error such as a connector disconnection based on the switch abnormality detection signal 1 is referred to as “abnormality 1”. An error such as a connector disconnection based on the switch abnormality detection signal 2 is referred to as “abnormal 2”.
In the process of step A191, it is determined that a switch abnormality is occurring regardless of whether "abnormality 1" or "abnormality 2" occurs.
If no switch abnormality is occurring (step A191; NO), it is subsequently determined whether or not an accessory error is occurring (step A193).
In the present embodiment, the first accessory device 51 and the heavenly accessory device 66 are provided as target accessory devices. Among them, the first accessory device 51 includes an accessory motor 81 (first motor). ), And the heavenly accessory device 66 is provided with a accessory motor 72 (second motor). Therefore, the occurrence of an accessory error here is determined as an occurrence of an accessory error no matter which error of the accessory motor 81 (first motor) or the accessory motor 72 (second motor) occurs. To do.

If no accessory error is occurring (step A193; NO), it is subsequently determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (step A194).
In the present embodiment, it is monitored whether or not the game ball won in the variable prize winning device 35 passes outside from the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63 and remains in the variable prize winning device 35. This is a monitoring function of the remaining sphere, and therefore, a left remaining sphere outlet switch 112 and a right remaining sphere outlet switch 113 are provided in order to detect game balls discharged from the variable winning device 35 to the outside (in detail). As before). If there is a remaining ball even after a predetermined period of time, the remaining ball error is determined to be occurring.
If no residual sphere error is occurring (step A194; NO), the process proceeds to step A195.
On the other hand, when a switch abnormality is occurring (step A191; YES), an accessory error is occurring (step A193; YES), or a remaining ball error is occurring (step A194; YES), either If at least one determination is YES, the process proceeds to step A196, and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A196). This is because a gaming machine error status signal is output to the outside when a gaming machine error status occurs such as when a switch abnormality occurs, an accessory error occurs, or a remaining ball error occurs. Thereby, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A196, the process proceeds to step A195.

Proceeding to step A195, the following determination processing is performed in each step of step A197, step A198, step A199, and step A200, including step A195.
(A) Step A195: It is determined whether or not abnormal discharge is occurring.
(B) Step A197: It is determined whether or not the magnet is illegal.
(C) Step A198: It is determined whether or not a board radio wave fraud is occurring.
(D) Step A199: It is determined whether or not vibration fraud is occurring.
(E) Step A200: It is determined whether or not a big prize opening fraud is occurring.
The abnormal discharge of step A195 means that the left remaining ball discharge port switch 112 and the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detect the discharge of the game ball even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not opened. This is due to an illegal winning action to the variable winning device 35.
The magnet fraud in step A197 is a case where the magnetic sensor 115 is turned on and abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms).
The board radio fraud in step A198 is when the board radio wave sensor 114 is turned on and an abnormal radio wave for the game board 30 is detected.
The vibration improper of step A199 is a case where the vibration sensor 116 is turned on and an improper vibration with respect to the game board 30 is detected.
The illegal prize winning in step A200 is a case where the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 serving as a big prize opening are illegally opened to win a game ball.
The determination that these abnormalities are occurring is made based on, for example, whether an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set or not.

Next, if the determination result of step A195 is NO, the determination result of step A197 is NO, the determination result of step A198 is NO, the determination result of step A199 is NO, and the determination result of step A200 is NO, the process proceeds to step A201. The off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A201). This is because a gaming machine error status signal indicating that gaming machine error statuses such as abnormal discharge, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, vibration fraud, and big prize opening fraud have not occurred is output to the outside. Thereby, off data of the gaming machine error state signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A201, the process proceeds to step A204.
On the other hand, if at least one of step A195, step A197, step A198, step A199, and step A200 is judged YES, the process branches to step A202. This is to notify the outside of the fraud if there is a determination result that at least one of the steps A195, A197, A198, A199, and A200 is occurring.
In step A202, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step A202). As a result, the ON data of the security signal is output to the outside via the external information terminal board 152. Next, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A203). This is because a gaming machine error status signal is output to the outside when one of the gaming machine error statuses is illegal among abnormal discharge, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, vibration fraud, and prize winning fraud. is there. Thereby, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A203, the process proceeds to step A204.

Proceeding to step A204, the address of the main prize ball signal control area is prepared (step A204), the on data of the main prize ball signal is prepared (step A205), and then the pulse signal editing process is performed (step A206). ). This is because the game control device 100 outputs one pulse of the main winning ball signal every time the number of winning balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). In addition, the signal is edited.
Next, an address of the prize winning number signal control area is prepared (step A207), and on data of the winning prize number signal is prepared (step A208), and then a pulse signal editing process is performed (step A209). This is to edit the signal so that the game control device 100 outputs one pulse of the winning prize signal every time the winning prize is counted. The prize winnings refers to winning in the variable winning device 35 as a big winning opening.

Next, an address of the start port 1 signal control area is prepared (step A210), and on data of the start port 1 signal is prepared (step A211), and then a pulse signal editing process is performed (step A212). This is to edit the signal so that the game control device 100 outputs one pulse of the start port 1 signal each time the winning at the start port 1 is counted. The start port 1 signal is a signal corresponding to winning in the first start winning ports 33a and 33b.
Next, the address of the start port 2 signal control area is prepared (step A213), and ON data of the start port 2 signal is prepared (step A214), and then the pulse signal editing process is performed (step A215). This is to edit the signal so that the game control device 100 outputs one pulse of the start port 2 signal each time the winning at the start port 2 is counted. The start port 2 signal is a signal corresponding to winning at the second start winning port 34.

Next, if the accessory count control timer is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step A216). The accessory count control timer is a timer for performing a control for outputting a signal for a predetermined time (for example, 128 ms) every time the special winning opening is opened by the special figure small hit (that is, the large winning opening in the starting game). Therefore, the accessory release frequency signal is output in one pulse when released once in the start game, and two pulses when released twice. Next, it is determined whether or not the accessory count control timer is “0” (step A217). If the accessory count control timer is “0” (step A217; YES), the off data of the accessory count signal is displayed. Is saved in the external information output data area (step A218). Thereby, the off data of the accessory frequency signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A218, the external information editing process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the accessory count control timer is not “0” (step A217; NO), the ON data of the accessory count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A219). Thereby, the ON data of the accessory frequency signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A219, the external information editing process is terminated.

[Pulse signal editing processing]
Next, the pulse signal editing processing (step A206, step A209, step A212, step A215) in the external information editing processing will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 70, in the pulse signal editing process, first, if the output control timer of the target signal is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step A231). The minimum value of the output control timer for the target signal is set to “0”.
The target signal is which of the main prize ball signal, the winning combination signal, the start port 1 signal, and the start port 2 signal described in FIG. 69 is the editing target of the current pulse signal editing process. It is a signal that points to.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the output control timer of the target signal is “0” (step A232). If the value of the output control timer of the target signal is “0” (step A232; YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the number of outputs of the target signal is “0” (step A233). . If the target signal output count is not “0” (step A233; NO), the target signal output count is updated by “−1” (step A234).
Next, the main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is saved in the output control timer area of the target signal (step A235). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the target signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A236), and the pulse signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the target signal output count is “0” (step A233; YES), the off data for turning off the target signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step A238), the pulse signal editing process is terminated.
Further, when the value of the output control timer of the target signal is not “0” (step A232; NO), it is determined whether or not the output control timer of the target signal is in the output on period (step A237). Note that the output control timer for the target signal is in the output-on period means that the value of the output control timer for the target signal is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).
If the output control timer for the target signal is in the output on period (step A237; YES), the process proceeds to step A236. If the target signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step A237; NO), the off data for turning off the target signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step A235), the pulse signal editing process is terminated.

Here, a specific example of the pulse signal editing process when the target signal is, for example, a main prize ball signal will be described. Note that the same pulse signal editing process is performed even if the target signal is a bonus prize signal other than the main prize ball signal, a start port 1 signal, or a start port 2 signal.
That is, when the target signal is the main prize ball signal, the main prize ball signal is sent from the game control device 100 to the external device (for example, an external device (for example, external) Management device). Note that the payout control device 200 outputs a one-pulse prize ball signal generated every 10 payouts to an external device (for example, an external management device).
That is, the game control apparatus 100 (main board) updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by “+1” for every 10 scheduled payouts (each time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process), and then The main prize ball number signal is output as many times as the number of updated (set) outputs. Then, in response to the main award ball signal output for every 10 payout schedules as described above, the award ball signal is transmitted when 10 payouts are actually made from the payout control device 200 (payout board). By matching the schedule and the result, it is possible to cope with illegal payout.

In addition, it becomes possible to determine when a winning has occurred from the main prize ball signal by a management device or the like as an external device, which helps the policy in hall sales.
Specifically, it can be determined whether a winning occurs during a big hit or a winning that occurs during a normal game. For example, it is not strange to win a lot of prizes during a big hit, but if there are a lot of prizes during normal games, it can be judged that the nail adjustment is too sweet. become.
On the other hand, if the main prize ball signal is not output to the external device, but only the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 that is output when the payout is completed, the payout is performed because the ball has run out during the big hit. In other words, it is impossible to determine when a winning has occurred when, for example, when the replenishment is delayed after the jackpot is over.
For this reason, if the replenishment is delayed after the end of the jackpot, there will be a large number of winnings (payouts) during normal games, which may lead to inadequacies in sales data. There is sex.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, both the main prize ball signal and the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 are used together, and the main prize ball signal is output immediately after winning a prize. The problem disappears.

[Transmission timing chart of main prize ball signal]
Next, a specific example of transmission of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to a timing chart shown in FIG.
In FIG. 71, when the target signal is the main prize ball signal, the main prize ball signal is sent from the game control device 100 to the external device (for example, one pulse of the main prize ball signal every 10 scheduled for the number of prize balls to be paid out). To an external management device).
Here, as shown in FIG. 71, the main prize ball signal of 1 pulse is 128 ms as the main prize ball signal is output as the output signal, and the on time (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal is 128 ms. One pulse signal is formed in such a manner that the time of the main prize ball signal in the off state (for example, low level) is 64 ms. Therefore, the total of one pulse is 128 ms + 64 ms = 192 ms.
The value of the output control timer for the target main prize ball signal is “48” when the main prize ball signal is turned on, “16” when the main prize ball signal is turned off, and the main prize ball signal is turned off. Is “0” at the timing of the last time point.

In this way, one pulse of the main prize ball signal is formed in the manner as shown in FIG. 71, and the game control device 100 sends the main prize ball signal of one pulse to the external device for every 10 prize balls to be paid out. Will be output. It should be noted that one pulse prize ball signal generated every 10 payouts is also output from the payout control device 200 to the external device.
Accordingly, the game control device 100 (main board) outputs a main award ball signal of 1 pulse for every 10 payout schedules (each time a payout command is transmitted), and 10 actually from the payout control apparatus 200 (payout board). When a payout is made, an award ball signal is transmitted, so that a match between the schedule and the result can be taken to cope with an illegal payout.
In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, if the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc., and it is paid out after the big hit, it has not been possible to determine whether or not the ball is due to a big hit only with the conventional prize ball signal. However, in this embodiment, the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning is added, so that the hall management device can collect (determine) accurate information.

E. Outline of Game Next, an outline of a game performed in the pachinko machine 1 of this example and a flow of the game will be described.
At the beginning of the game (or before the game), the customer is waiting (during the demonstration), and a command for instructing display of the customer waiting screen is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, The information display 45 displays an effect waiting for the customer.
Then, when the player operates the launch operation handle 11 to start the game, the game ball at the launch position is driven into the game area 32 via the guide rail 31, and the game ball that has been driven is first started. When a prize is entered in any of the winning openings 33a and 33b, the collective display device 50 displays the variation of the special figure 1 and the information display 45 displays the variation of the decorative special figure. Further, the balls that have been removed without winning in the first start winning holes 33 a and 33 b flow into the out hole 37.
After winning a prize in one of the first start winning holes 33a, 33b and the special figure 1 of the collective display device 50 fluctuates for a predetermined time, a small hit occurs based on the result mode of the stop symbol, and the variable prize winning device The movable members 43a and 43b at 35 (large winning opening) perform an operation of opening once or opening twice.

When a game ball wins the second start winning opening 34, the special display 2 of the collective display device 50 changes for a predetermined time, and the movable member 43a of the variable winning device 35 in the result mode of all the stop symbols. 43b perform the opening operation twice.
Note that the small win is the opening of the large winning opening when the winning winning opening (all starting winning openings of the first starting winning openings 33a and 33b and the second starting winning opening 34) is won (the fluctuation of the variable winning apparatus 35). The operation from the opening of the movable members 43a and 43b of the winning device 35) until the game ball passes through the special winning area 69 and wins a V, and a big win lottery is performed. This is up to winning a big winning opening (variable winning device 35).
As described above, when the small hit is once released, the movable members 43a and 43b open (convert to the second state) and close again after a predetermined time (0.5 seconds here). The opening operation in a predetermined manner such as operation is performed once. Further, in the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a, 43b perform a predetermined mode of opening operation (here, an opening operation of 0.8 seconds) and a closing operation of a predetermined time (here, 0.8 seconds). It will be held twice.
Further, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening), the special figure is held (holding of the special figure 2) only for one. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 33a, 33b (first start opening), the special figure is not held (the special figure 1 is not held).

Further, in this embodiment, when winning is made at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b or the second starting winning opening 34), all the results of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 on the collective display device 50 are obtained. It is a small hit and there is no losing. That is, when the start prize is received, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened in the variable winning device 35, and the number of times the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened due to the difference in the stop pattern of FIG. 1 or FIG. Is different.
In the small hitting operation, there are a case where the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once and a case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened twice, which are shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). FIG. 46A shows a case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once as a small hit, and FIG. 46B shows a case where the movable members 43a and 43b are opened twice as a small hit.
As shown in FIG. 46A, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened once, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state), and a predetermined time has elapsed. An opening operation in a predetermined manner is performed once, such as a closing operation again later (here, after 400 ms has elapsed). Therefore, in the case of releasing once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened for 400 ms, and the small amount of the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within this period. A hit operation is performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened twice, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened (converted to the second state), and the predetermined prize is given. The opening operation in a predetermined manner is repeated twice after a lapse of time (here, after 400 ms has elapsed). In this case, the first opening period of the movable members 43a and 43b is, for example, 400 ms. Subsequently, the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after the elapse of 400 ms, and then a predetermined wait time (1000 ms) is provided. Then, the movable members 43a and 43b continue to be closed, and at the same time as the predetermined wait time ends, the second opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b is performed. The opening period of the second movable members 43a and 43b is also 400 m, for example. Therefore, in the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened for 400 ms, and the operation is performed twice with a predetermined wait time. Then, a small hitting operation is performed in such a manner that the game ball can be won in the variable winning device 35 within the period in which the opening operation is performed twice.

When the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation once or twice by the small hitting operation, the game ball becomes the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35 at the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b open. The game balls that have flowed into contact with the bridge main body 80 of the seesaw-structured first accessory device 51, and due to the inclination of the bridge main body 80, the game balls are in the left and right inflow spaces (the heaven inflow space 62, the hell inflow space). 63).
At this time, since the stopper solenoid control pointer is set according to the value of the small hitting operation by the process of step S665 in the special figure display process (FIG. 43), the bat member 53 in the first accessory device 51 is moved up and down. The game advantageous to the player is played.
Specifically, control of the accessory solenoid 204 for driving the bat member 53 up and down in the first accessory device 51 is performed, and the game ball rolls on the bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51 to be in hell. An operation of blocking the bat member 53 from flowing into the inflow space 63 by driving it upward is performed. As a result, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the game ball to flow into the heaven inflow space 62 while watching the operation of the bat member 53 blocking the flow into the hell inflow space 63. it can.

On the other hand, even if the operation of the bat member 53 is performed as described above, the game ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 35 contacts the bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51 having the seesaw structure, and the inclination of the bridge body 80 is increased. As a result, the game ball flows into either the left or right heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63.
When the game ball flows into the heaven inflow space 62, the game ball enters the heavenly acting device 66, travels around the heaven rotator 67 rotating at a constant speed, and then enters the heaven rotator 67. Either it fits into the formed V winning recesses 68a, 68b or falls into the inflow space 75.
When the game ball that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 is fitted and supported in any of the V winning recesses 68a and 68b, the ball falls into the special winning area 69, and at this time, passes through the special winning area 69. The ball is detected by the specific area switch 111, and a big win lottery is started as a V prize.
On the other hand, if the game ball that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 does not fit into any of the V winning recesses 68a and 68b, the ball flows out into the inflow space 75 and passes through the remaining ball discharge area 70. The sphere passing through the remaining sphere discharge area 70 is detected by the right remaining sphere discharge switch 113. In this case, there is no big hit, there is merely a winning in the variable winning device 35, and there are only a predetermined number of winning balls.

Now, when the big win lottery is started as a V prize, one of the three modes of “16R big hit”, “per 7R”, and “per 3R” is selected depending on the lottery result. It is determined.
This state is shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, and the V jackpot display unit 211 is provided by the board effect device 46 so as to correspond to each of “16R jackpot”, “7R hit”, and “3R hit” which are lottery winning results. Any one of the heart jackpot display unit 212 and the star jackpot display unit 213 faces the front, and an effect of notifying the player of the current jackpot is performed.
For example, if the lottery result for the big hit is “16R big hit”, the board directing device 46 causes the V big hit display unit 211 to face the front, and the player is notified of the current big hit. When “16R jackpot” is reached, a round game with full opening as shown in FIG. 52 is performed up to 16 rounds. That is, the round game by full opening continues until all rounds of the 16R big hits, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 become the big hits that are controlled to be released in all rounds. When the 16R big hit game ends, the process returns to the special figure normal processing (the same applies to “per 7R” and “per 3R”).

If the lottery result for the big hit is “7R big hit”, the board directing device 46 causes the heart big hit display unit 212 to face the front to produce an effect informing the player of the current big hit. When “7R jackpot” is reached, a round game with full opening as shown in FIG. 52 is performed up to 7 rounds. In the subsequent 8 to 16 rounds, a round game is performed by opening a short as shown in FIG. In the short opening, the opening time of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 is short, and the round is substantially free of balls.
Even when the heart jackpot display unit 212 is selected, rank-up opening to promote to V jackpot equivalent to “16R jackpot” may be performed during the round effect or interval effect.
In rank-up release, as shown in FIG. 52, in the case of a 16R big hit, it is a round-up release operation in the 8th round (substantially the big 7th round because it excludes the first round) Is done. Therefore, during a specific round game (during a specific round), an effect of suddenly being promoted to 16R jackpot is performed, and a so-called 16R jackpot rank-up game is played.

Furthermore, if the big hit lottery result is “3R big hit”, the board directing device 46 causes the star big hit display unit 213 to face the front to give the player an announcement of the current big hit. When “3R jackpot” is reached, a round game with a full opening as shown in FIG. 52 is performed up to three rounds. In the subsequent 4 to 16 rounds, a round game by short-opening as shown in FIG. 52 is performed. In the short opening, the opening time of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize winning device 35 is short, and the round is substantially free of balls.
Even when the star jackpot display unit 213 is selected, it may be promoted to a V jackpot equivalent to “16R jackpot” or a heart jackpot equivalent to “per 7R” during a round effect or an interval effect.
In rank-up release, as shown in FIG. 52, out of 16R big hits, in the case of hits that appear to be around 3R, Become. Therefore, during a specific round game (during a specific round), an effect of suddenly being promoted to 16R jackpot is performed, and a so-called 16R jackpot rank-up game is played.

Next, in the present embodiment, the seesaw-structured bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51 is driven, the heavenly rotating body 67 of the heavenly accessory device 66 is driven, and the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 are opened once. Since there is a feature in the symbol and the symbol distribution rate of the twice-opened symbols, these operations will be described in detail.
In the ROM 171B of the game microcomputer 171 in the game control device 100, for example, a variation pattern for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effect, and the presence or absence of the reach state. As shown in FIG. 73, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, one of the variable pattern distribution tables is a time setting for the first accessory device 51 and the heavenly accessory device 66, and a movable member in the variable prize winning device 35. Patterns such as the allocation rate of the symbols 43a and 43b that are opened once and the symbols that are opened twice are set in advance. Then, the CPU 171A refers to this variation pattern distribution table and controls to determine the variation pattern.
Note that the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 73 describes the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the special figure 1 fluctuates.

The flow of the game balls will be described. In this embodiment, when the winning prize opening (the first starting prize opening 33a, 33b or the second starting prize opening 34) is won, the special display 1 or the special figure 2 in the collective display device 50 is shown. The results of the variable display are all small hits, and the opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 is performed.
When the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation, the game ball can enter the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35, and then flows into the winning space 41 when the game ball flows into the winning space 41. The game ball comes into contact with the bridge main body 80 of the seesaw-type first accessory device 51, and depending on the inclination of the bridge main body 80, the game ball enters any of the left and right inflow spaces (the heaven inflow space 62 and the hell inflow space 63). Will flow in.
At this time, since the stopper solenoid control pointer is set according to the value of the small hitting operation, the bat member 53 in the first accessory device 51 is driven up and down, and a game advantageous to the player is played. In other words, an operation is performed in which the bat member 53 is prevented from moving in the hell inflow space 63 while the game ball rolls over the bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51. Even if the bat member 53 is operated as described above, the game ball that has flowed into the variable prize winning device 35 contacts the bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51 having the seesaw structure, and due to the inclination of the bridge body 80, It flows into either the left or right heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63.

When the game ball flows into the heaven inflow space 62, the game ball enters the heavenly acting device 66, travels around the heaven rotator 67 rotating at a constant speed, and then formed on the heaven rotator 67. Either it fits into the V winning recesses 68a, 68b or falls into the outflow inflow space 75.
When a game ball that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 is fitted and supported in any of the V winning recesses 68a and 68b, the ball falls into the special winning area 69, and the gaming ball that has dropped into the special winning area 69 is the specific area. Detected by the switch 111, a big win lottery is started as a V prize.
On the other hand, if the game ball that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 does not fit into any of the V winning recesses 68a and 68b, the ball will flow into the inflow space 75 and pass through the remaining ball discharge area 70, and the remaining balls The ball passing through the discharge area 70 is detected by the right remaining ball discharge switch 113, and is not a big hit, only winning the variable winning device 35, and there is only a predetermined number of winning balls.

Among the flow of the game balls as described above, the player is aimed at the timing when the bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51 having the seesaw structure tilts (specifically, the bridge body 80 tilts to the right and flows into heaven. And the timing at which the heavenly rotating body 67 of the heavenly acting device 66 rotates (specifically, the timing at which the game ball fits into the V winning recesses 68a and 68b formed on the heavenly rotating body 67). If these timings are easily known, it is easy for a player to hit a big hit. Then, in consideration of the timing at which the big hit is likely to be hit, the game ball is fired so that the big hit is likely to be hit.
In this case, the player predicts the driving cycle of the bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51 and the rotation cycle of the heavenly rotating body 67 of the heavenly agent device 66, and the player is predicted to hit the jackpot. This is because it is possible to predict whether or not the game ball fits into the V winning recesses 68a and 68b if aimed at the timing.
That is, there is a bias in the combination of the driving cycle of the bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51 and the rotation cycle of the heavenly rotating body 67 of the heavenly agent device 66, and the bridge body 80 tilts to the right side and the game ball flows into heaven. If the V winning recesses 68a and 68b of the heavenly rotating body 67 are rotating at a timing that is highly likely to fit the game ball that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 in time with the timing of flowing into the space 62, a big hit will be given. It will be hit. In other words, there is a bias in the appearance rate of the combination position of the movement of the bridge body 80 and the movement of the heavenly rotating body 67, and if there is a timing at which a big hit can be aimed at in the bias, the attention is focused on that and it is aimed at .

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the combination of the driving cycle of the bridge main body 80 of the first accessory device 51 and the rotation cycle of the heavenly rotating body 67 of the heavenly agent device 66 is analyzed. Even when the timing is low, the appearance rate of the combination position of the driving position of the bridge main body 80 of the first accessory device 51 and the rotational position of the heavenly rotating body 67 of the heavenly accessory device 66 is not biased, and the appearance is almost constant. Setting it to be a rate makes it difficult to hit big hits.
In other words, there is no bias in the appearance rate of the combined position of the movement of the bridge body 80 and the movement of the heavenly rotating body 67, the timing at which it is possible to hit the big hit is virtually eliminated, and the timing of hitting the game ball at any timing The appearance rate of the combination position of the drive position of the main body 80 and the rotation position of the heavenly rotating body 67 is substantially constant and does not change.

Therefore, first, an operation by driving the bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51 will be described.
The first accessory device 51 is controlled based on the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG.
FIG. 72 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the first accessory device 51.
In FIG. 72, the accessory motor 81 is a step type motor (so-called seesaw motor) that drives the bridge body 80 so as to swing left and right like a seesaw about the center as a fulcrum. It rotates at a speed of 8 ms for each step, and in the counterclockwise rotation (CCW), it rotates at a speed of 8 ms for each step.
The first motor switch 82 detects whether the accessory motor 81 tilts the bridge body 80 to the left or right. When the bridge body 80 is not tilted to the left or right and is substantially horizontal, the first motor switch 82 The motor switch 82 is in a light shielding state. On the other hand, when the bridge body 80 is inclined, the first motor switch 82 is switched from light shielding to light passing. By monitoring the rotation direction of the accessory motor 81 and the state of the first motor switch 82, it is possible to detect whether the bridge body 80 is inclined to the left or right.
The bridge body 80 has an operation mode of stopping, inclining to the left, and inclining to the right.

FIG. 72 shows a one-cycle movement (operation) until the bridge body 80 returns from the state of being inclined to the left to the state of being inclined to the left again. When the bridge body 80 is tilted to the left, the accessory motor 81 is rotated counterclockwise, and the first motor switch 82 is in a light shielding state, waiting for a change from light shielding to light passing. State.
Next, after the bridge main body 80 is temporarily stopped from this state, the movement driven to incline to the right side is the start of one cycle of movement.
That is, when the timing 80 ms when the first motor switch 82 changes from light shielding to light passing (the maximum setting is 80 ms) elapses, the accessory motor 81 is stopped from the counterclockwise rotation. Stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, when 100 ms elapses from the timing when the period of 80 ms ends, an accessory effect start command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. As a result, under the control of the effect control device 300, the information display 45 and the panel effect device 46 display effects such that the bridge body 80 tilts toward the heaven inflow space 62 on the right side. Due to this effect, the player feels that the game ball tends to flow into the heaven inflow space 62, and can enjoy a hot game.
In the case where a liquid crystal information display device 451 is installed instead of the information display device 45, the effect control device 300 controls the effect control device 300 based on the effect effect effect start command to say “It is hot when winning a prize now!”. An effect of displaying a message may be performed.

The stop period of the bridge main body 80 here is 160 ms, and when the 160 ms elapses, the accessory motor 81 starts to rotate clockwise from the stop state. At this time, the first motor switch 82 switches from passing light to blocking light in response to the accessory motor 81 starting to rotate clockwise from the stopped state. When 240 ms elapses from the timing when the accessory motor 81 starts to rotate clockwise, the first motor switch 82 switches from light shielding to light passing and enters a waiting state. In addition, the bridge body 80 starts to tilt to the right from the stopped state and is tilted to the right. If the bridge body 80 is tilted to the right, the game ball easily flows into the heaven inflow space 62.
When 80 ms (set to a maximum of 80 ms) elapses from the timing when the first motor switch 82 changes from light shielding to light passing during the right tilt, the accessory motor 81 stops rotating in the clockwise direction and stops. As a result, the bridge body 80 is stopped from being tilted to the right.

Next, when 1600 ms elapses from the timing at which the accessory effect start command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, an accessory effect end command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. As a result, under the control of the effect control device 300, the state in which the effect display such that the bridge body 80 is tilted to the heaven inflow space 62 on the right side is ended on the information display 45. By the end of this effect, the player knows that the state where the game ball easily flows into the heaven inflow space 62 has ended.
In addition, by transmitting an effect effect end command from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the effect control device 300 can know the progress status of the special figure variable game of the collective display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100. There is an advantage that it is easy to produce an effect corresponding to the special figure variation game on the frame side.
The 1600 ms is constant even if there is an operation delay of the accessory motor 81 due to a ball biting error or the like, and the command transmission interval is a constant time.

When 160 ms elapses from the timing when the 80 ms period ends, the accessory motor 81 starts to rotate counterclockwise from the stopped state. At this time, the first motor switch 82 switches from passing light to blocking light in response to the accessory motor 81 starting to rotate counterclockwise from the stopped state. In addition, the bridge body 80 starts to tilt to the left side from the stopped state, starts to tilt to the left side, and is gradually tilting to the left. If the bridge body 80 is tilted to the left, the game ball easily flows into the hell inflow space 63.
Next, when 240 ms elapses from the timing at which the accessory motor 81 starts to rotate counterclockwise (start timing toward the left tilt), one cycle has just elapsed.
That is, one cycle of movement (operation) is performed until the bridge body 80 returns from the state of being inclined to the left to the state of being inclined to the left again.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 72, the operation | movement of 1 period until the bridge | bridging main body 80 returns from the state in which it is in the left inclination to the state in the left inclination again is performed repeatedly. In this case, the time of one cycle is set as a set value, for example, 4000 ms. However, for a while from the start timing of one cycle, as shown in FIG. 72, the first motor switch 82 is in a state of waiting for a change from light shielding to light passing, and this period is in each pachinko machine 1. There are some differences.
As described above, the first accessory device 51 repeatedly performs the operation of one cycle as shown in FIG. 72 based on the set value of the variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 73 shows one of the variation pattern distribution tables. In this variation pattern distribution table, for example, in the time setting of the first accessory device 51 and the heavenly agent device 66, the variable winning device 35 Patterns such as the allocation rate of the once-opened symbols and the twice-opened symbols of the movable members 43a and 43b are set in advance.
Further, in the variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 73, when the first bonus device 51 and the heavenly bonus device 66 are arranged as guidance devices, and the game ball flows into the variable winning device 35, the first bonus game After passing through the device 51, if it flows into the heaven inflow space 62, it reaches the heavenly acting device 66, and if it fits in the V winning recesses 68a, 68b, it corresponds to the configuration that is a big hit.
Further, the variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 73 is an example in which the cycle of the first actor device 51 is divided into eight and the cycle of the heavenly officer device 66 is divided into four.
More specifically, data is set as follows.
(A) Time setting of the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51): setting the period and time (ms) The period is 1/8 to 8/8, and a multiple of 1/8, where 1/8 is the minimum unit. The first cycle is divided into 8 by increments and the cycle is set, and the second cycle is also divided into 4/8 to 4/8 and the cycle is set. However, no time is set in the 1/8 and 2/8 sections of the second period. This is to make a difference between the reach time value and the non-reach fluctuation time value, and this portion is not used.
On the other hand, the time is set by dividing the first round into 8 times, for example, time 800 ms at cycle 1/8, time 1000 ms at cycle 2/8,..., Cycle 8/8 (ie 1 In the period), the time is set to 4000 ms. Similarly, in the second period, the period is set by being divided into 4/8 up to 4/8. However, as described above, time is set in the 1/8 and 2/8 sections of the second period. Absent.

(B) Time setting of the accessory 2 (the heavenly accessory device 66): set the cycle and time (ms) The cycle is set to a minimum unit of 1/4 and from 1/4 to 4/4 in increments of 1/4. The period 1/8 of the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51) is set to be divided into four. On the other hand, the time is also set in such a manner that the period 1/8 of the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51) is subdivided into four, and the time is 4 from 300 ms to 1200 ms with the minimum unit being 300 ms. It is set in the indicator.
Then, the period and time setting in the four sections as described above correspond to each of the eight sections of the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51), that is, the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51). Corresponding to each of the eight divided periods, the time and period of four divisions of the accessory 2 (the heavenly accessory device 66) are set. Note that the time / period values of the four divisions of the accessory 2 (the heavenly accessory device 66) are the same in each of the eight categories of the accessory 1 (the first accessory device 51).
Also, the second period is limited to 3/8 and 4/8 sections, and the period is set by being divided into four. However, no time is set in the 1/8 and 2/8 sections of the second period. This is to make a difference between the reach time value and the non-reach fluctuation time value, and this portion is not used.
Here, “reach” means that the special figure is changed longer than the non-reach change, and the meaning is slightly different from the reach in one type of gaming machine. In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the special figure becomes a long reach fluctuation, the possibility of opening twice becomes high (the opening time is only once in a short non-reach fluctuation time).

(C) Total variation time value (ms): Special pattern variation pattern time This is the difference between the operation time of the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51) and the operation time of the accessory 2 (heavenly agent device 66). This is the total value and corresponds to the special pattern variation pattern time.
That is, the total value of the operating time of the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51) and the operating time of the accessory 2 (heavenly agent device 66) is from a minimum of 800 ms to a maximum of 5200 ms in one cycle.
In addition, although there are 5800 ms to 7200 ms in 2 cycles, as described above, time is not set in the 1/8 and 2/8 sections of the 2nd cycle. This is to make a difference between the reach time value and the non-reach fluctuation time value, and this portion is not used.

(D) Sorting (%):
This is because when the game ball wins the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b or the second starting winning opening 34), all the results of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 on the collective display device 50 are obtained. It is a small hit, and the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable prize winning device 35 (large prize opening) perform the operation of opening once or twice, and in that case, the ratio allocated to the operation of opening once or twice is determined. What is shown is the distribution (%). It can also be said as a distribution ratio or a distribution ratio (%).
In the case of a special symbol design in which the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once, 97% is assigned as a whole, and in the case of a special symbol design that is opened twice, the total is 3%. It becomes distribution. And in the case of a special symbol design in which the movable members 43a, 43b are opened once, the period 1/8, 2/8, 5/8, 6/8 of the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51), In the sections 7/8 and 8/8, the distribution is set to 12.89%, but in the sections of the periods 3/8 and 4/8, the distribution is set to 7.50% and 9.80%, respectively. Has been.
This is because the operation of the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51) may extend over the second cycle in the section of the cycle 3/8, 4/8, in which case the value of the second cycle is also added. Since the distribution values are set for the entire first and second weeks, the values are lower than those of the other categories. Therefore, the intervals of the cycles 3/8 and 4/8 in the second cycle are lower than those in the other sections in the same manner as the values of the same cycle interval in the second cycle.

(E) Appearance rate (%):
This is because, when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 33a, 33b, all of the results of the variable display in FIG. 1 on the collective display device 50 are small hits, and the movable member 43a in the variable winning apparatus 35 (large winning opening). 43b perform an operation of opening once or opening twice, in which case the appearance rate (%) indicates the appearance ratio of the symbol that is opened once and the symbol that is opened twice. In addition, when a game ball wins the 2nd start winning opening 34, all are opened twice, and the appearance rate of the symbol of 2 times opening becomes 100%.
In the section of the cycle 3/8, 4/8 of the first cycle, the operations of the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51) and the accessory 2 (heavenly agent device 66) may also extend in the second cycle. In this case, add the value for the second period. Distribution values are set for the entire first and second weeks so that there is no significant difference in the appearance rate (%).
In addition, the appearance rate (%) is not set in the 1/8 and 2/8 sections of the second period. This is to make a difference between the reach time value and the non-reach fluctuation time value, and this portion is not used.
The total of the appearance rate (%) is obtained by multiplying the appearance rate of the symbol corresponding to the number of times of opening by the appearance rate of the period for each release, and is surrounded by the zone X and the bold line shown in FIG. The values are almost the same except for the zone Y, and there is almost no difference.
Here, the zone X shown in FIG. 73 is in the first cycle 3/8 and 4/8 in the first cycle of the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51) and the accessory 2 (heavenly accessory device 66). It corresponds.
Further, the zone Y shown in FIG. 73 corresponds to the second cycle 3/8, 4/8 in the second cycle of the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51) and the accessory 2 (heavenly accessory device 66). doing. For the accessory 1 (the first accessory device 51) and the accessory 2 (the heavenly accessory device 66), the operation may extend not only in the first cycle but also in the second cycle. The value of the 2nd cycle is added to the value of the 1st cycle, and the appearance rate (%) is set so that there is almost no difference from other sections in the overall values of the 1st and 2nd weeks. Yes.

(F) Total (%):
This is the rate of appearance for each of the first and second weeks, including the first and second week movements in the first and second objects (first and second tool devices 51 and 66). (%) Is added up, and there is almost no difference in the appearance rate (%) in all sections, and it is set to the same value.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 73, if the sum is equal, it is difficult (practically impossible) to hit the jackpot.
Here, since the positional relationship of operation in the accessory 1 (the first accessory device 51) and the accessory 2 (the heavenly accessory device 66) is the same, the appearance rates (%) are added together.
Here, the concept that the positional relationship of operation in the above-mentioned accessory 1 (first accessory device 51) and the accessory 2 (heavenly accessory device 66) is the same means as follows.
In other words, in this embodiment, the time from when the winning opening (first starting winning opening 33a, 33b and second starting winning opening 34) is won until the large winning opening (variable winning device 35) is opened (special figure variation). The amount of movement of the accessory device (corresponding to the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51) and the accessory 2 (heavenly accessory device 66); the same applies hereinafter) that corresponds to the time is determined. In this case, since the accessory device is periodically moving, the time when the same position is reached again in the case of the fluctuation time of one cycle or less and the case of the fluctuation time of the second cycle or more.
The non-reach variation time is a time within one cycle (because it is up to 8/8 cycles), and the reach is a variation time entering the second cycle. In particular, since the amount of movement of the accessory device is known after the elapse of the variation time in the reach from the start opening prize, the position of the second period is derived when the periodical movement is corrected. The position of the accessory device in the first cycle at the time of non-reach fluctuation corresponding to the same position as the position in the second cycle is said to be the same (first period 3/8, second period 3/8, etc.) That is.
Therefore, if the positional relationship of operation in the accessory device is the same as described above, the total appearance rate (%) is calculated by adding the values of zone X and zone Y shown in FIG. .

As described above, in this embodiment, in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of the type belonging to the so-called feather object, the special figure fluctuation display (display by the collective display device 50) is adopted as a countermeasure for stopping and the special figure fluctuation is adopted. The time is defined as a time obtained by equally dividing the cycles of the first and second heavenly agent devices 51 and 66, and the operations of the first and second heavenly agent devices 51 and 66 corresponding to the divided cycles appear evenly. I am doing so. Special figures include special figures 1 and 2.
In addition, by incorporating the reach variation display into the special figure variation pattern, the pachinko game of the type belonging to the winged thing is innovative and improved gameplay, and the reach variation display is displayed to improve gameplay. When provided, the time value of the reach variation display is also set based on the period of the first accessory device 51 and the heavenly agent device 66. In addition, the time value from the start to the stop of the special figure including the reach fluctuation display is made to appear evenly with respect to the states of the first and second heavenly agent devices 51 and 66. The distribution of the normal fluctuation in which the reach fluctuation in the figure and the operations of the first accessory device 51 and the heavenly agent device 66 are at the same position is set to be reduced in advance.
This is the rate of appearance of one feature position when the reach time and the non-reach time that are the same accessory position (the operation positions of the first accessory device 51 and the heavenly accessory device 66; hereinafter the same) are added. Since two are added, they are reduced in advance. In addition, since the positional relationship of the two actors appears only in a non-reach period at a period smaller than 1, that is, 1/8, 2/8, 5/8 to 8/8, it can be calculated independently. (That is, do not decrease in advance as described above).

More specifically, in the present embodiment, the period and time of the first accessory device 51 as the guidance device are divided into a plurality of periods of one period and two periods and divided into a period smaller than one period, and the heavenly object Similarly, for the period and time of the device 66, one period and two periods are subdivided into a plurality of periods smaller than one period, the time of each subdivided period is calculated, and the characteristics in each subdivided period are calculated. In the variation pattern of the figure, the distribution ratio (%) of the symbol that is opened once and the symbol that is opened twice is almost equal (for example, as shown in FIG. .89 ") (including a portion for adding data of the first and second rounds).
As a result, even for the cycle in which the first accessory device 51 and the heavenly agent device 66 as the guidance device are combined, the appearance rate (%) of the symbol that opens once is shown in the special pattern variation pattern for each subdivided cycle. As indicated by 73, the value is substantially “3.22”, which is uniform.
Therefore, no matter what timing the player launches the game ball, the timing when the bridge body 80 of the seesaw-type first accessory device 51 tilts (specifically, the bridge body 80 tilts to the right and the heaven inflow space 62 And the timing of the rotation of the heavenly rotating body 67 of the heavenly acting device 66 (specifically, the timing at which the game ball fits in the V winning recesses 68a and 68b formed in the heavenly rotating body 67). It is not easily understood, and therefore it can be made difficult for the player to hit the jackpot. Therefore, the player does not know the timing of how to hit the jackpot, and does not intentionally stop the game ball.

Further, in this embodiment, since the first device 51 and the heavenly material device 66 as the guidance device are combined, the ball after the game ball is won in the variable winning device 35. The movement of the game will become diverse, and the fun of the game will improve.
Moreover, the control of the accessory solenoid 204 for driving the bat member 53 up and down in the first accessory device 51 is performed, and the game ball rolls on the bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51 to move into the hell inflow space 63. Since the operation of blocking the bat member 53 from moving upward is performed, the player can enjoy the game while thrilling and expecting the game ball to flow into the heaven inflow space 62. it can.
As described above, in the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) provided with the variable winning device 35, the game ball improves the interest when it flows down in the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35, and prevents the hitting. can do.

This background will be described.
The above-described stop hitting is to intentionally stop the launch at a predetermined timing in order to perform a so-called big hit aim hit, and to launch the game ball at a timing at which the big hit hit can be made. If this stoppage is made, it is not a normal way to play at an amusement store, and sales will decrease, so prevention thereof is desired. In addition, if a big hit is made, it becomes an unfair gaming mode with other players, so a countermeasure is desired. One of them is to provide a gaming machine that has no effect even if it is stopped.
In the present embodiment, there is an excellent effect that it is possible to prevent stoppage in the background as described above.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Starting prize opening,
A variable winning device,
In a gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs when a gaming ball flows into a special winning area in the variable winning device,
The variable winning device is provided with a guiding device that guides the game balls won in the variable winning device so as to easily flow into the special winning area, while repeating a predetermined cyclic operation.
When a game ball wins the start winning opening, a special figure variation display game is started, and an opening control means for operating the variable prize winning device with an opening pattern based on a stop pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game;
A variation time selecting means for selecting, as a variation time of the special figure variation display game, from among a plurality of variation times set in advance based on an operation time during which the guidance device operates from a reference position to a predetermined operation position;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the first accessory device 51 and the heavenly accessory device 66 constitute a guidance device, and the game control device 100 constitutes an opening control means, a variation time selection means, and a special figure variation control means. The ROM 171B constitutes a variable time storage unit. Further, the first start winning ports 33a and 33b and the second start winning port 34 correspond to start winning ports. The variable winning device 35 corresponds to a variable winning device, and the special winning area 69 corresponds to a special winning area.

Moreover, the invention concept of the said structure in the case of restricting to a blade | wing monotype game machine is represented as follows.
A winning space that can be converted into a first state that is disadvantageous to the player and a second state that is advantageous to the player, and where a game ball accepted by the conversion to the second state flows down, and flows down the winning space The game area is provided with a variable prize device having a general prize area and a special prize area into which game balls flow in,
When a game ball launched into the game area wins a start winning opening, the start game for converting the variable winning device into the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and is accepted by the conversion to the second state. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball flows into the special winning area,
The variable winning device is provided with a guiding device that guides the game balls won in the variable winning device so as to easily flow into the special winning area, while repeating a predetermined cyclic operation.
When a game ball wins the start winning opening, a special figure variation display game is started, and an opening control means for operating the variable prize winning device with an opening pattern based on a stop pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game;
A variation time selecting means for selecting, as a variation time of the special figure variation display game, from among a plurality of variation times set in advance based on an operation time during which the guidance device operates from a reference position to a predetermined operation position;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Next, the inventive concept of the variation pattern distribution table as shown in FIG. 73 is expressed as follows.
The variation time of the special figure variation display game is set from an operation amount at which the guidance device operates from a reference position to a predetermined operation position, and an operation time required for the operation from the guidance device to the predetermined operation position,
A variation time storage means for storing a plurality of variation times for the special figure variation display game;
The variation time storage means is
Storing the variation time distribution values so that the distribution values of the plurality of variation times are substantially equal in correspondence with the operation amount of the guidance device;
The variation time selection means includes:
A gaming machine, wherein a variation time of the special figure variation display game is selected from a plurality of variation times stored in the variation time storage means.

Next, as in this embodiment, the inventive concept in the case where two first accessory devices 51 and heavenly accessory devices 66 are arranged as guidance devices is expressed as follows.
The variable prize device includes a plurality of the guidance devices,
The structure is such that the game balls sequentially pass through each guidance device and guide the winning game balls so as to easily flow into the special prize area,
The operation time of one cycle of the plurality of guidance devices is configured to be different,
The fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is
A gaming machine that is set in association with the time of one cycle of the plurality of guidance devices.

Next, in relation to the present embodiment, the background of a type of gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) belonging to a so-called feather object is as follows.
Conventionally, in a type of gaming machine belonging to a so-called blade object, a gaming machine that takes into account the reach of special figure variation has not been designed.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the special drawing 1 of the collective display device 50 fluctuates for a predetermined time when winning is made in either of the first start winning ports 33a and 33b, the result of the stop symbol A small hit is generated based on the mode, and at this time, the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 (large winning opening) are operated to open once or twice. This is when a reach game is inserted into the special figure fluctuation pattern and a small hit occurs. Depending on the type of the stop symbol, it is discriminated whether to open once or twice.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the first opening winning opening 33a, 33b, which is originally opened once (movable members 43a, 43b are opened once), is opened twice (movable members 43a, 43b). 43b is opened twice), and a special figure variation display game that is opened twice is incorporated a game that causes reach in the special figure variation.
Therefore, compared to the prior art, in the present embodiment, the double opening of the movable members 43a and 43b is adopted for winning the first start winning holes 33a and 33b, so that the game performance of the pachinko game can be improved. .
In addition, the ROM 171B of the gaming microcomputer 171 includes, for example, a variation pattern distribution table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. Since the special figure variation display game is performed based on such data, the pattern of the special figure variation is particularly applied to the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of the type belonging to the blade object while preventing the stoppage. By including the reach variation in the game, it is possible to achieve both the prevention of stoppage and the improvement of the game performance of the pachinko game.

The inventive concept in the case of controlling the special figure variation display game as described above is expressed as follows.
Comprising special figure fluctuation control means for controlling the special figure fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game,
The special figure fluctuation control means includes:
The special figure variation display game suggests that the opening pattern of the variation winning device may be different from the normal operation, performs control including reach variation that performs longer than normal variation, and sets the reach variation time to Set based on the time of one cycle of the guidance device
The opening control means includes
While controlling the variable winning device with a plurality of types of open patterns, and including the period of 1 or less of the guidance device obtained from the variation time of the reach variation, so that the appearance rate of all the cycles is substantially equal, A game machine characterized in that a variation time of a variation time of a special figure variation display game is distributed and set. .

Next, a modified example of the present invention will be described.
The present invention may be modified as follows.
(1) In this embodiment, the guidance device (the first accessory device 51, the heavenly accessory device 66) is controlled by a motor. Good.
(2) Further, in this embodiment, the division of the operation cycle in the guidance device (the first accessory device 51, the heavenly accessory device 66) is x / 8, x / 4 (see FIG. 73). It is not limited. For example, what is necessary is just to set suitably by the structure and operation | movement content of a guidance apparatus.
(3) Of the above-described embodiments of the present invention, the configuration employing the liquid crystal information display device 451 is an example in which the operations of the video, audio, decoration, and accessory are controlled by a single effect control board. For example, a configuration in which control is performed by a plurality of effect control boards may be used, or a configuration in which a plurality of CPUs are mounted on the same board and shared control may be performed.
By doing so, the processing speed increases as the processing load on each CPU is reduced. In addition, the program size of each CPU can be reduced.

Next, the scope of application of the present invention will be described.
(1) As long as the gaming machine uses pachinko balls to play a game, the gaming machine is not limited to the example as in the embodiment but can be applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine.
(2) Moreover, it is only necessary to have a display device capable of displaying a special figure as a gaming machine, and therefore, it can be widely applied to general gaming machines provided with a video device such as a liquid crystal display.
(3) The liquid crystal information display device 451 is not limited to a display device using liquid crystal, but can change display contents such as an organic EL, a cathode ray tube, a dot LED, a 7 segment LED, a device using a bending material such as electronic paper. Any member can be used as long as it can be produced.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 4 Front frame 5 Glass frame 15 Direction button 30 Game board 33a, 33b 1st start winning opening 34 2nd starting winning opening 35 Fluctuating winning apparatus 41 Winning space 43a, 43b Movable member 45 Information display 46 Board directing apparatus 50 Collective display apparatus 51 First equipment device (guidance device)
66 Heavenly equipment (guidance device)
69 special winning area 72 accessory motor 81 accessory motor 100 game control device (opening control means, variation time selection means, special figure variation control means, variation time storage means)
171B ROM (variable time storage means)
200 payout control device 300 effect control device

Claims (1)

Starting prize opening,
A variable winning device,
In a gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs when a gaming ball flows into a special winning area in the variable winning device,
The variable winning device is provided with a first guiding device and a second guiding device for repeating a predetermined operation as one cycle and guiding a game ball won in the variable winning device to a special winning area. With
Fluctuation control means for executing a fluctuation display game that fluctuates identification information based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening;
Opening control means for operating the variable winning device in an opening pattern based on the result of the variable display game;
The first guidance device and the second guidance device are set to a plurality of preset operation times as an operation time during which the guidance device operates from one of a plurality of predetermined operation positions to an operation initial stop position as a reference position . A variation time selection means for selecting the variation time of the variation display game from among the variation times,
The plurality of variation times are:
A first time corresponding to a first divided period obtained by dividing one period of the first guidance device by a first numerical value;
Using a second time corresponding to a second divided period obtained by dividing one period of the second guidance device by a second numerical value different from the first numerical value,
“Variable time = first time × A + second time × B (A is an integer of 1 or more, B is an integer of 1 or more and the second numerical value or less)” is established,
The opening pattern includes a first opening mode and a second opening mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first opening mode,
The variation time of the variation display game includes a first variation time that is equal to or less than an addition value of a time required for one cycle of the first guidance device and a time required for one cycle of the second guidance device, and the first A second variation time longer than one variation time ,
When the variation display game by the second variation time is executed, the release pattern can be the second release mode,
The variation time selection means includes:
Gaming machine in which all of said plurality of predetermined operating position, and sets the selectivity of the plurality of time-varying so as to generate substantially uniformly.

Images